Ricoh 3800c (Model j Machine Code 060) Service Manual

Model J(Machine Code: G060)

SERVICE MANUAL

February 23rd, 2001Subject to change

!IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICESPREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the printer and peripherals,make sure that the printer power cord is unplugged.

2. The wall outlet should be near the printer and easily accessible.

3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers offor open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrifiedor mechanically driven components.

4. The printer drives some of its components when it completes the warm-upperiod. Be careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electricalcomponents as the printer starts operation.

5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot whilethe printer is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components withyour bare hands.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes byaccident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye dropsor flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The printer and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer servicerepresentative who has completed the training course on those models.

2. The NVRAM module (option) installed on the controller has a lithium batterywhich can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with anidentical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM.Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled inaccordance with local regulations.

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenlywhen exposed to an open flame.

2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or theorganic photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These arenon-toxic supplies.)

3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do notput more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or notsealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do notput more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or notsealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

LASER SAFETY

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair oflaser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repairedin a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem isreplaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is notrepairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return allchassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement ofthe optical subsystem is required.

!WARNINGUse of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other thanthose specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

!WARNINGWARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the

procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section. Laserbeams can seriously damage your eyes.

CAUTION MARKING:

Trademarks

Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation in the United States and /or other countries.

PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business MachinesCorporation.

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may betrademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involvedwith those marks.

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 1-11.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-1

1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-11.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL.............................................................................1-11.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT.................................................1-21.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2

1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ..........................................................1-31.3 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART ................................................................1-41.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION .......................................................................1-51.5 OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION.............................................................1-7

1.5.1 LIST OF OPTIONS...........................................................................1-7Note for Transporting the Machine .......................................................1-7

1.5.2 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION .........................................................1-8Accessory Check ..................................................................................1-8Installation Procedure ...........................................................................1-9

2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-12.1 USER MAINTENANCE .............................................................................2-12.2 SERVICE MAINTENANCE........................................................................2-3

3 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT......................................... 3-13.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ......................................................................................3-13.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................3-2

3.2.1 REGISTRATION...............................................................................3-2Leading Edge........................................................................................3-2Side to Side ..........................................................................................3-2Adjustment Standard ............................................................................3-2For standard trays, optional paper feed units,LCT and bypass feed table ...................................................................3-2For duplex unit ......................................................................................3-2Adjustment Procedure ..........................................................................3-2

3.2.2 COLOR REGISTRATION.................................................................3-3Line Position Adjustment ......................................................................3-3Adjustment for Line Speed of Fusing Unit.............................................3-3

3.2.3 PRINTER GAMMA ...........................................................................3-4Adjustment Overview............................................................................3-4Adjustment Procedure ..........................................................................3-4

3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS ................................................................................3-53.3.1 REAR COVER AND UPPER REAR COVER ...................................3-53.3.2 PAPER EXIT TRAY..........................................................................3-53.3.3 UPPER RIGHT COVER ...................................................................3-53.3.4 FRONT COVER ...............................................................................3-63.3.5 LEFT COVER AND REAR LEFT COVER ........................................3-63.3.6 UPPER LEFT COVER AND OPERATION PANEL ..........................3-7

3.4 LASER OPTICS ........................................................................................3-8

ii

3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS.......................................................3-83.4.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT ....................................................3-9

Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit...............3-113.4.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR ........................................................3-123.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ........................3-12

3.5 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...........................................................3-133.6 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-14

3.6.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS ..........................3-14Tray 1 and Tray 2 ...............................................................................3-14By-pass Tray.......................................................................................3-14

3.6.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD ...........................................3-153.6.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR...............................................3-153.6.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT .......................................................................3-163.6.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSOR .......................3-173.6.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES.............................................................3-173.6.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH..............................................................3-183.6.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .......................................................................3-18

3.7 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT .......................................3-193.7.1 TRANSFER UNIT...........................................................................3-193.7.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT..............................................3-203.7.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER .............................3-213.7.4 TRANSFER BELT ..........................................................................3-22

3.8 FUSING...................................................................................................3-243.8.1 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................3-243.8.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-253.8.3 PAPER EXIT ..................................................................................3-25

3.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS................................................................3-263.9.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY ...............3-263.9.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, B OUT OF THE WAY.........................................................................3-263.9.3 CONTROLLER AND BCU..............................................................3-273.9.4 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE.......................................3-28

NVRAM for BCU .................................................................................3-28NVRAM for Controller .........................................................................3-28NVRAMs for both BCU and Controller ................................................3-28

3.9.5 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B .........3-293.9.6 PSU ................................................................................................3-29

3.10 DRIVE UNIT ..........................................................................................3-303.10.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-303.10.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-303.10.3 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - CMY .....................................3-313.10.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K...................................................................................3-313.10.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K...........................................3-32

4 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-14.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS .........................................4-1

4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT .........................................4-14.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT...............................4-1

iii

4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT .......................................4-24.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................4-5

4.2.1 SUMMARY .......................................................................................4-5SC Classification...................................................................................4-5

4.3 SC TABLE .................................................................................................4-74.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-32

4.4.1 SENSORS ......................................................................................4-324.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-334.6 LEDS (BCU) ............................................................................................4-33

5 SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-15.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-1

5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ...........5-1Entering the Service Mode....................................................................5-1Accessing the Required Program .........................................................5-2Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program...............................5-2Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-2

5.2 PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE.............................................5-35.2.1 REMARKS........................................................................................5-3

Display on the Control Panel Screen ....................................................5-3Others ...................................................................................................5-4

5.2.2 SERVICE MODE MENU (“1. SERVICE”) .........................................5-55.2.3 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING ........................................................5-6

5.3 PRINTER ENGINE SERVICE MODE........................................................5-75.3.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE (“2. ENGINE”) ..........................................5-75.3.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE...................................................................5-44

Table 1: Paper Height Sensor.............................................................5-46Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) ...................................................5-46Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ..................................................5-46

5.3.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE...............................................................5-475.3.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997) ...........................................................5-51

5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE......................................................5-525.4.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE....................................................................5-525.4.2 ERROR RECOVERY......................................................................5-52

Engine Firmware/Controller NIB Firmware .........................................5-52Controller System Firmware: ..............................................................5-52

5.4.3 CONTROLLER/ENGINE FIRMWARE UPGRADE .........................5-535.5 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ....................................................5-54

5.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................5-545.5.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ..................................................5-55

5.6 USER PROGRAM MODE .......................................................................5-565.7 DIP SWITCHES.......................................................................................5-57

Controller Board..................................................................................5-57

6 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ....................................... 6-16.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................6-16.1.2 PAPER PATH...................................................................................6-26.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-3

iv

6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4Overview...............................................................................................6-4Descriptions ..........................................................................................6-5

6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS......................................................................6-66.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-8

6.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-86.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-8

Overview...............................................................................................6-8Process Control Self Check ..................................................................6-9

6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-10Step 1: VSG Adjustment......................................................................6-10Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment............................6-11Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation .................................6-12Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection...........................................6-12Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection.........................................................6-13

6.2.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .........................................................6-14Overview.............................................................................................6-14Toner Supply Control Modes ..............................................................6-14

6.2.5 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION............................6-15Introduction .........................................................................................6-15Toner Near End Detection ..................................................................6-15Toner End Detection...........................................................................6-15Toner End Recovery ...........................................................................6-15

6.2.6 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION ......................................................6-166.3 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-17

6.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-176.3.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-186.3.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR ........................................6-19

Overview.............................................................................................6-19Main Scan Start Detection ..................................................................6-19Clock Frequency Adjustment ..............................................................6-19

6.3.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-20Dual Beam Mechanism.......................................................................6-20Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism...............................................6-20

6.3.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH.....................................................................6-216.3.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENTS ............................6-22

Overview.............................................................................................6-22Sub Scan Line Position for YCM.........................................................6-23Main Scan Line Position for KYCM.....................................................6-23Magnification Adjustment....................................................................6-23Main Scan Skew Adjustment ..............................................................6-24

6.4 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT ...................................................................6-256.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-256.4.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-266.4.3 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING .............................................6-276.4.4 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-28

v

6.4.5 WASTE TONER COLLECTION .....................................................6-296.4.6 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION ...............................6-306.4.7 PCU DETECTION (DEVELOPMENT UNIT DETECTION) .............6-31

6.5 DEVELOPMENT .....................................................................................6-326.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-326.5.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-336.5.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION .............................................................6-346.5.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS ...................................................................6-356.5.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT DETECTION..............................................6-356.5.6 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM .....................................................6-36

Overview.............................................................................................6-36Toner Agitation ...................................................................................6-36Toner Transport ..................................................................................6-37

6.5.7 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION ...............................................6-386.6 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................6-39

6.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-396.6.2 DRIVE – TRAYS 1 AND 2 ..............................................................6-406.6.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2..........................................................6-416.6.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2....................................6-426.6.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2 ..............................6-436.6.6 PAPER END DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2 ....................................6-436.6.7 REGISTRATION.............................................................................6-446.6.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED...........................................................6-456.6.9 BY-PASS TRAY..............................................................................6-46

6.7 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION...................................6-476.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-476.7.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE ..............................................................6-486.7.3 TRANSFER AND CLEANING CURRENT ......................................6-496.7.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING .......................................................6-506.7.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT ........................................................6-51

Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51ACS (Auto Color Sensing) Mode ........................................................6-52

6.8 FUSING...................................................................................................6-536.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-536.8.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE.....................................................................6-546.8.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL............................................6-55

Fusing Temperatures..........................................................................6-55Temperature Corrections ....................................................................6-56Overheat Protection............................................................................6-56

6.8.4 OIL SUPPLY AND CLEANING.......................................................6-576.8.5 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION............................6-586.8.6 NEW FUSING UNIT DETECTION..................................................6-596.8.7 ENERGY SAVER MODE................................................................6-60

Level 1 Energy Saver Mode................................................................6-60Level 2 Energy Saver Mode................................................................6-60

6.9 PAPER EXIT ...........................................................................................6-616.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-616.9.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ................................................6-62

6.10 CONTROLLER......................................................................................6-63

vi

6.10.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-636.10.2 BOARD LAYOUT..........................................................................6-656.10.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING .......................................................6-66

RPCS Driver .......................................................................................6-66PCL5c Driver ......................................................................................6-66PS3 Driver ..........................................................................................6-67CMS (Color Management System) .....................................................6-67Gray Correction ..................................................................................6-67BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)............................6-67Gamma Correction .............................................................................6-67Toner Limitation ..................................................................................6-68Dither Processing and ROP/RIP.........................................................6-68

6.10.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS .......................................................6-69Sample Print .......................................................................................6-69Locked Print........................................................................................6-69Paper Source Selection ......................................................................6-70Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)...........................................................6-70Tray Lock ............................................................................................6-70Manual Tray Select .............................................................................6-70Auto Continue .....................................................................................6-71Overview.............................................................................................6-71Auto Tray Select .................................................................................6-71Manual Tray Select .............................................................................6-71Paper Output Tray ..............................................................................6-72Output Tray Selected..........................................................................6-72Sequential Stacking ............................................................................6-72Stapling...............................................................................................6-73Punching.............................................................................................6-73

6.11 IEEE1394 INTERFACE .........................................................................6-746.11.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................6-74

Hardware Specification.......................................................................6-74System Requirements.........................................................................6-74

6.11.2 IEEE1394 .....................................................................................6-746.11.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM........................................................................6-756.11.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT.......................................................................6-756.11.5 REMARKS ABOUT THIS INTERFACE KIT..................................6-766.11.6 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES ....................................................6-76

PERIPHERALS

DUPLEX UNIT (Machine Code: G571)

1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................G571-11.1 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT.................................................................G571-1

1.1.1 TOP COVER .............................................................................G571-1

vii

1.1.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD ....................................................G571-11.1.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1................................................G571-21.1.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH ........................G571-21.1.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR.............G571-31.1.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2 ............................................................G571-3

1.2 DUPLEX FEED UNIT .........................................................................G571-41.2.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD...........................................................G571-41.2.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR ...........................................................G571-41.2.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR..........................................................G571-5

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................G571-62.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................G571-62.2 DUPLEX OPERATION .......................................................................G571-7

2.2.1 UP TO A4/LT(81/2" X 11") LEF .................................................G571-72.2.2 LARGER THAN A4/LT(81/2" X 11") LEF...................................G571-7

2.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT.................................................................G571-82.3.1 DRIVE........................................................................................G571-82.3.2 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE) .....G571-92.3.3 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT..............................................G571-102.3.4 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER ...........................................G571-11

With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit ....................................G571-11With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit ........................G571-11

2.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT .......................................................................G571-122.4.1 DRIVE......................................................................................G571-122.4.2 FEED-IN AND FEED-OUT ......................................................G571-12

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT (Machine Code: G567)

1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................G567-11.1 COVER REPLACEMENT...................................................................G567-11.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT .................................................................G567-2

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS ........G567-21.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ......................................G567-31.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ...........................................................................G567-41.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH .....................................................................G567-41.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT................................................G567-5

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................G567-62.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................G567-6

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT....................................G567-62.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.....................................G567-72.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................G567-8

TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT (Machine Code: G568)

1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................G568-1

viii

1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT...................................................................G568-11.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT .................................................................G568-2

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS ........G568-21.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ......................................G568-31.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS.........................................................................G568-41.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES ................................................................G568-41.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT................................................G568-5

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................G568-62.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................G568-6

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT....................................G568-62.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.....................................G568-72.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................G568-8

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY (Machine Code: G569)

1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................G569-11.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME..........................G569-11.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ..............................................................G569-11.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE ...............................................G569-21.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR ..................................................G569-31.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR ...........................................................................G569-41.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH........................G569-51.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH .....................................................................G569-61.8 PAPER FEED UNIT ...........................................................................G569-71.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS.....................................................................G569-81.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER............................G569-9

2 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...............................G569-102.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................G569-10

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT..................................G569-102.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................G569-11

2.2 PAPER FEED...................................................................................G569-122.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE ..........G569-132.4 TRAY LIFT .......................................................................................G569-142.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION.........................................................G569-152.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM...................................G569-162.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION ........................................G569-17

TWO-TRAY FINISHER (Machine Code: G565)

1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................G565-11.1 COVERS ............................................................................................G565-1

1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS................................................................G565-11.1.2 INNER COVER..........................................................................G565-1

ix

1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER.....................................................................G565-21.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR......................................................................G565-21.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR .......G565-31.5 STAPLER TRAY.................................................................................G565-31.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/ TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ........................................................G565-41.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR.............................................................G565-51.8 LIFT MOTORS ...................................................................................G565-51.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR .....................................................................G565-71.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS ..............................................G565-81.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR .............................................G565-81.12 STAPLER UNIT................................................................................G565-91.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR................................................G565-91.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR.........................................................................G565-10

1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS..................................................................G565-10tray Shift Sensors and tray release sensor ..................................G565-11

1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR ........................................................G565-111.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH .............................................G565-11

1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD ...............................................................G565-121.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT.....................................G565-12

2 TROUBLESHOOTING .........................................................G565-132.1 JAM DETECTION.............................................................................G565-13

3 SERVICE TABLES...............................................................G565-143.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS .................................................................G565-143.2 TEST POINTS..................................................................................G565-143.3 FUSES .............................................................................................G565-14

4 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ................................................G565-154.1 GENERAL LAYOUT .........................................................................G565-154.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................G565-164.3 JUNCTION GATES ..........................................................................G565-174.4 TRAY SHIFTING ..............................................................................G565-18

4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS ..................................................G565-18Tray 1 (Upper Tray) .....................................................................G565-18Tray 2 (Lower Tray) .....................................................................G565-19

4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ....................................................G565-204.5.1 TRAY 1 ....................................................................................G565-20

Introduction ..................................................................................G565-20Normal and sort/stack modes ......................................................G565-20Staple Mode.................................................................................G565-21Tray 1 release mechanism...........................................................G565-22

4.5.2 TRAY 2 ....................................................................................G565-234.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM .....................................................G565-24

4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM.....................G565-25Vertical Paper Alignment .............................................................G565-25Horizontal Paper Alignment .........................................................G565-25

4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM ..................................................................G565-26

x

4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT...........................................................G565-26Stapler Rotation ...........................................................................G565-26Side-to-Side Movement ...............................................................G565-26

4.7.2 STAPLER ................................................................................G565-274.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT...............................................G565-28

4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)..............................................................G565-294.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM .................................................G565-294.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ..............................................G565-30

FOUR-BIN MAILBOX (Machine Code: G566)

1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT...................................G566-11.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL.........................................................G566-11.2 TRAY PAPER/OVERFLOW/VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSORS..........................................................................................G566-21.3 MAIN MOTOR REPLACEMENT ........................................................G566-3

2 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ..................................................G566-42.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT.....................................................................G566-4

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT....................................G566-42.1.2 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................G566-4

2.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS .................................G566-52.3 BASIC OPERATION...........................................................................G566-62.4 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ....................................................G566-7

SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................SPEC-11 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS..............................................................SPEC-1

1.1 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES......................................................SPEC-31.1.1 PAPER FEED...........................................................................SPEC-31.1.2 PAPER EXIT ............................................................................SPEC-4

2 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ..............................................................SPEC-52.1 PRINTER DRIVERS....................................................................SPEC-52.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE..................................................................SPEC-5

3 MACHINE CONFIGURATION..............................................................SPEC-64 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT .....................................................................SPEC-8

4.1 500-SHEET TRAY.......................................................................SPEC-84.2 1000-SHEET TRAY.....................................................................SPEC-84.3 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY.....................................SPEC-84.4 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT .....................................SPEC-94.5 FOUR-BIN MAILBOX ................................................................SPEC-10

23 February, 2001 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1-1

Ins

tall

ati

on1. INSTALLATION

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT

1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH

3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 2,000 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)

4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more

5. Avoid exposing the machine to sudden temperature changes, which include:1) Direct cool air from an air conditioner2) Direct heat from a heater

6. Avoid installing the machine in areas that might be exposed to corrosive gas.

7. Install the machine at a location lower than 2,500 m (8,200 ft.) above sea level.

8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be nomore than 5 mm.)

9. Avoid installing the machine in areas that may be subjected to strong vibration.

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")

Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 23 February, 2001

1-2

1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.

A: Over 460 mm (18")

B: Over 100 mm (4")

C: Over 550 mm (22")

D: Over 700 mm (28")

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

!CAUTION

1. Insert firmly the plug in the outlet.

2. Avoid using an outlet extension plug or cord.

3. Ground the machine.

1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A

2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 %

3. Do not put or place anything on the power cord.

G060I103.JPG

23 February, 2001 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

1-3

Ins

tall

ati

on

1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

ItemNo.

Options Alternative Required

1 PFU (1 Tray) Items 2, 32 PFU (2 Trays) Items 1, 33 LCT Items 1, 24 Two-tray finisher • Item 7

• Item 8 (Total 128 MB needed) or 9• Item 1, 2 or 3

5 3 types of punch kit

Item 6

Item 46 Four-bin mailbox Items 4, 57 Duplex unit8 3 types of memory DIMM9 HDD10 IEEE 1394 Item 811 NVRAM

NOTE: Two memory DIMMs (up to 384 MB) can be installed.

INSTALLATION FLOW CHART 23 February, 2001

1-4

1.3 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART

The following flow chart shows how to install the optional units more efficiently.

Two-tray Finisher: Needs the duplex unit, HDD or at least 128 MB of memory,and a paper tray unit or LCT.

Punch Unit: Needs the finisher.IEEE1394 Board: Needs the memory DIMM.

Unpack the printer.

Will the paper feed unit or LCT be installed?

Place the printer on the paper feed unit or LCT.Install the paper feed unit or LCT.

Install the controller options (if required).

Yes No

Will the duplex unit be installed?

Install the duplex unit.

Install the four-bin mailbox(if required).

Install the two-tray finisher.

Install the printer.

Yes No

NoYes

Install the punch unit(if required).

Will the Two-tray finisher be installed?

G060I002.WMF

23 February, 2001 MACHINE INSTALLATION

1-5

Ins

tall

ati

on

1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION

Refer to the Operating Instructions for details.

If the customer has a service contract, change the settings of the following SPmodes depending on the contract type.

Item SP No. Function DefaultMeter charge SP5-930-1 Specifies whether the meter charge

mode is enabled or disabled.Meter charge mode enabled:• The Counter menu appears

immediately after the Menu key ispressed.

• The counter type selected by thecounting method (SP5-045-1) can bedisplayed with the Counter menu.

• The counter values can also beprinted with the Counter menu.

• The selected counter starts from anegative number.

Meter charge mode disabled:• The Counter menu is not displayed.• The total counter starts from 0.

Off

Counting method SP5-045-1 Specifies whether the countingmethod used in meter charge mode isbased on developments or prints.Important:This SP can only be done before thenegative counters are reset with SP7-825-001

Developments

A3/11" x 17"double counting

SP5-104-1 Specifies whether the counter isdoubled for A3/11" x 17" paper.

No: Singlecounting

PM warningdisplay 1

SP5-930-3 Specifies whether the PM warning forPCUs and development units isdisplayed when the replacement timearrives.Type 1: DisplayedType 2: Not displayed

Type 1

PM warningdisplay 2

SP5-930-4to

SP5-930-5

Specifies whether the PM warning forthe paper feed roller and transfer unitis displayed.

Off:

Fax No. setting SP5-812-2 Programs the service station faxnumber.The number is printed on the counterlist when the meter charge mode isselected, so that the user can fax thecounter data to the service station.

MACHINE INSTALLATION 23 February, 2001

1-6

Item SP No. Function DefaultCounter reset SP7-825-1 Resets the counters to 0.

Important: This must be done atinstallation after all the above settingshave been finished. The negativecounters used in meter charge modewill be reset to zero.

NOTE: 1) The default setting for this machine is meter-charge mode off.2) The meter-charge counter cannot be reset.

23 February, 2001 OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION

1-7

Ins

tall

ati

on

1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION

1.5.1 LIST OF OPTIONS

The available options are listed below. Except for the punch unit, installation isexplained in the Operating Instructions.

• Paper Feed Unit (500 sheets x 1)• Paper Feed Unit (500 sheets x 2)• Large Capacity Tray• Two-tray Finisher• Punch Unit• Four-bin Mailbox• DIMM Memory (64/128/256 MB)• IEEE1394 Board• HDD• NVRAM

Note for Transporting the Machine

If it is difficult to slide the machine across the floor after installing the optional paperfeed unit or LCT, remove the two stands with the following procedure.

1. Remove all trays in the optional paper feed unit or LCT.

2. Remove the front stand [A] (! x 2).

3. Remove the rear stand [B] (! x 2, 2 brackets).

CAUTION: Reinstall the two stands in their original positions, or the machine mighttip over when drawing out the paper trays and so on.

G571R112.WMFG568I901.WMF[A]

[B]

OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION 23 February, 2001

1-8

1.5.2 PUNCH UNIT INSTALLATION

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the followinglist:

Description Q’ty

1. Punch unit ..................................................................................1

2. Sensor arm ................................................................................1

3. Hopper .......................................................................................1

4. Step screw .................................................................................1

5. Spring.........................................................................................1

6. Spacer (2 mm) ...........................................................................1

7. Spacer (1 mm) ...........................................................................1

8. Tapping screw............................................................................1

9. Tapping screw............................................................................2


1-9

Ins

tall

ati

on

Installation Procedure

!CAUTIONSwitch off the main machine and unplug its power cord. If the two-trayfinisher is installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine.

1. Unpack the punch unit and remove all tapes and shipping retainers.

2. Open the front door and remove the rear cover [A] (! x 4).

3. Remove the bracket [B] (! x 2) and paper guide [C] (! x 1).

B377I102.WMF

B377I103.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

OPTIONAL UNIT INSTALLATION 23 February, 2001

1-10

4. Remove the hopper cover [A] (! x 2).

5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped ! x 1).

6. Install the spring [C].

7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D].

8. Install the punch unit [E] (! x 2, stepped ! x 1).

B377I101.WMF

B377I104.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]


1-11

Ins

tall

ati

on

9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp them as shown.

10. Slide in the hopper [B].

11. Fasten the two 1 mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment.NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the punch

holes.

12. Reassemble the finisher and check the punch operation.

B377I200.WMF

B377I106.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

23 February, 2001 USER MAINTENANCE

2-1

Pre

ven

tive

Ma

inte

na

nc

e

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2.1 USER MAINTENANCE

The following maintenance kits are available for the customer to do PM.

Type A Color (C/M/Y) PCU 100KPType B Color (C/M/Y) Development Unit 150KPType C Fusing Unit 100KPType D Black Development Unit / Dust Filter 150KPType E Waste Toner Bottle 50KPType F Black PCU 100KPType G Oil Supply Unit 20KPType H Paper Feed Rollers 150KP

Chart: A4(LT)/5%Mode: 5 prints/jobEnvironment: Normal temperature and humidityYield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.

When the machine’s default settings are used, an error message is displayed whena maintenance counter reaches the value in the PM table below, except for theitems in maintenance kit H.

NOTE: To have the machine display the message for maintenance kit H also, setSP5-930-4 to 1.

After the user replaces the items in a maintenance kit, the machine automaticallyresets the counter for this maintenance kit, except for the items in kit H.

NOTE: Except for the items in kit H, the machine can automatically detect whennew items have been installed.

The machine stops when the counters for parts in maintenance kits C, E and Greach the replacement value in the following table.

NOTE: To have the machine display the alert only for maintenance kits C, E, andG, set SP5-930-3 to 0.

USER MAINTENANCE 23 February, 2001

2-2

Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect

Main Unit

Item 20K 50K 100K 150K EM RemarksBlack PCU

RIncluded in maintenancekit F

Color (Y/M/C) PCUR

Included in maintenancekit A

Black Development UnitR

Included in maintenancekit D

Color (C/M/Y) Development UnitR

Included in maintenancekit B

Fusing UnitR

Included in maintenancekit C

Oil Supply UnitR

Included in maintenancekit G

Waste Toner BottleR

Included in maintenancekit E

Dust FilterR

Included in maintenancekit D

Pick-up RollerR

Included in maintenancekit H

Feed RollerR


Separation RollerR


Punch Kit

Item 10K EM RemarksChads I Discard chads.

23 February, 2001 SERVICE MAINTENANCE

2-3

Pre

ven

tive

Ma

inte

na

nc

e

2.2 SERVICE MAINTENANCE

NOTE: After replacing the transfer unit, make sure to reset the maintenancecounter using SP7-804-16 and 7-804-27.After replacing paper feed rollers, reset the maintenance counters for thesealso: By-pass tray (7-804-10), Tray 1 (7-804-11), Tray 2 (7-804-12), Tray3/LCT (7-804-13), Tray 4 (7-804-14)

Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect

Main unit

Item 20K 50K 100K 150K 1,000K EM RemarksTransfer Unit RBy-pass Feed Roller RBy-pass Pick-up Roller RBy-pass Separation Roller R

One-tray Paper Feed Unit (500 sheets x 1)

Item 20K 50K 100K 150K 1,000K EM RemarksRelay Roller C Damp clothBottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth

Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (500 sheets x 2)


LCT (2000 sheets)


Two-tray Finisher

Items 20K 50K 100K 150K 1,000K EM RemarksRollers C Damp clothDischarge Brush C Dry clothSensors C Blower brushJogger Fences I Replace if required.

Four-bin Mailbox

Item 20K 50K 100K 150K 1,000K EM RemarksRollers C Damp clothTray Paper Sensors

CBlower blush or drycloth

23 February, 2001 SPECIAL TOOLS

3-1

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

!CAUTIONTurn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any ofthe procedures in this section.

NOTE: This manual uses the following symbols.☛ : See or refer to ! : Screw " : Connector# : Clip ring $ : E ring

3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS

Part Number Part Name Q’tyA2309352 Flash Memory Card - 4MB 1G0219350 Loop-back connector - Parallel 1

IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 23 February, 2001

3-2

3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3.2.1 REGISTRATION

Leading EdgeAdjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.

Side to SideAdjusts the side to side registration for each paper feed station.NOTE: The side to side registration for the optional paper feed unit, LCT, and

duplex unit can be adjusted with SP mode or with the user tools(Maintenance menu).

Adjustment Standard

For standard trays, optional paper feed units, LCT and bypass feed table

• Leading edge: 4.2 ± 2 mm• Side to side: 4.2 ± 2 mm

For duplex unit

• Leading edge: 4.2 ± 4 mm• Side to side: 4.2 ± 4 mm

Adjustment Procedure

1. Enter SP mode and access SP5-997.

2. Print out the pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP5-997.

3. Perform the leading edge registration adjustment.1) Check the leading edge registration [A] and adjust it with SP1-001.2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).3) Input the value then press the [Escape] key.4) Check the leading edge adjustment by generating the trim pattern.

4. Perform the side to side registration adjustment.1) Check the side to side registration [B] and adjust it with SP1-002.2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).3) Input the value then press the [Escape] key.4) Check the side to side adjustment by generating the trim pattern.

A

B

G060R007.WMF

Feed direction

23 February, 2001 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3-3

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.2.2 COLOR REGISTRATION

Line Position AdjustmentNormally, the automatic line position adjustment is executed under a specifiedcondition to optimize the color prints. If a color registration shifts such as aftermoving the printer, execute “Auto Adjust” with the user tools maintenance menu orSP5-993-2 to do the forced line position adjustment.

Adjustment for Line Speed of Fusing Unit

Optimize the line speed for the fusing unit when the color registration shifts moreon the trailing edge compared with that on the leading edge, even after lineposition adjustment is executed. Adjust the speed of development motor-K with thefollowing user tool in the Maintenance menu.“Menu/Maintenance/Color Regist./Fuser Adjust/Custom Adjust”

Refer to Maintenance Guide 1 of the Operating Instructions for how to adjust this.

IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 23 February, 2001

3-4

3.2.3 PRINTER GAMMA

NOTE: Normally, the printer gamma is enough to adjust the color balance toarchive the optimum print output. The gamma correction is only requiredfor fine-tuning to meet the user requirements.

Adjustment Overview

Make the gradation scales on the printout smooth from the highlight to the shadowdensity. Adjust the CMY gradation scale at the top of the chart by balancing thedensity of the C, M, and Y gradation scales – the CMY gray scale should changesmoothly from minimum to maximum, and there should be no coloration.

For each color, you can adjust 15 points between 0 (lowest density) and 255(highest density).

The gradation scales marked ‘Default Value’ are printed according to the defaultgamma settings. The gamma adjustment changes the densities at the adjustablepoints in the gradation scale. The gradation scale marked “Current Value” showsthe current settings.

During the adjustment procedure, compare the “Current Value” gradation scalewith the ‘Default Value’. Select the density for each of the 15 adjustable points,excluding points 0 and 255, from the ‘Default Value’ gradation scale.

The NVRAM holds three printer gamma settings, those saved this time (Current),those saved in the preceding adjustment (Previous), and the factory settings(Factory).

Adjustment Procedure

1. Enter SP mode.

2. Select “1.Service”.

3. Select “Data Recall” and load the settings that will serve as the base for theadjustment.

4. Select “Mode Selection”, and select the print mode that you are going to adjust.

5. To review the image quality for these settings, choose “Test Page” to print out acolor calibration test sheet.

6. Select “Gamma Adj.”.

7. Adjust the color density at each of the 15 points for a color (CMY and K).

8. When the density setting is complete for all colors, print out a color calibrationtest sheet again and make sure that the gradation scale for each printed coloris smooth and that the CMY gradation scale is gray. Repeat the adjustment ifthere is an anomaly.

9. If the adjustment results prove satisfactory, execute “Data Save”.

23 February, 2001 EXTERIOR COVERS

3-5

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS

3.3.1 REAR COVER AND UPPER REAR COVER

1. Rear cover [A] (! x 4, 2 hooks)

2. Remove the optional mailbox if it isinstalled.

3. Upper exit cover [B] (1 hook), if theoptional mailbox is not installed.

4. Open the upper right cover [C].

5. Upper rear cover [D] (! x 4)

3.3.2 PAPER EXIT TRAY

1. Paper exit tray [A] (! x 2)

3.3.3 UPPER RIGHT COVER

1. Right cover [A] (! x 2)NOTE: To loosen the screws, close

the upper right cover; toremove the right cover, openthe upper right cover.

2. Upper right cover [B]

G060R201.WMF

G060R202.WMF

G060R204.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[B]

[A]

[A]

EXTERIOR COVERS 23 February, 2001

3-6

3.3.4 FRONT COVER

1. Front cover [A] (2 pins)

3.3.5 LEFT COVER AND REAR LEFT COVER

1. Remove the optional finisher from theprinter if it is installed.

2. Remove the optional duplex inverterunit if it is installed.

3. Connector cover [A], if the optionalduplex unit is not installed

4. Left cover [B] (! x 6)

5. Open the left door [C].

6. Rear left cover [D] (! x 3)

G060R410.WMF

G060R714.WMF

G060R717.WMF

[A]

[D] [C]

[B]

[A]

23 February, 2001 EXTERIOR COVERS

3-7

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.3.6 UPPER LEFT COVER AND OPERATION PANEL

1. Open the front cover.

2. Open the upper light cover

3. Operation panel [A] (! x 2, " x 2, 2hooks)

4. Upper left cover [B] (! x 2, 1 hook)

G060R716.WMF

[A]

[B]

LASER OPTICS 23 February, 2001

3-8

3.4 LASER OPTICS

!WARNINGTurn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any ofthe procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.

3.4.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

Caution decals are placed as shown below.

! WARNINGBe sure to turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug from thepower outlet before beginning any disassembly or adjustment of the laserunit. This printer uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nmand an output of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.

LASER CAUTION 1.TIF

G060R203.WMF

LASER CAUTION 2.TIF

23 February, 2001 LASER OPTICS

3-9

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.4.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3 EXTERIORCOVERS)

2. Upper rear cover (☛ 3.3 EXTERIORCOVERS)

3. Paper exit tray (☛ 3.3 EXTERIORCOVERS)

4. Right cover (☛ 3.3 EXTERIORCOVERS)

5. Securing screws for the toner supplyunit [A] (! x 4)

6. Hold the toner supply unit [B] up ➀.Then, lower the unit ➁.NOTE: The pin [C] for the front and

rear shafts holds the tonersupply unit.

7. Connector cover [D] (! x 1)

8. Four flat cables [E]

9. Connector [F]

G060R205.WMF

G060R206.WMF

G060R207.WMF

[D]

[C]

[B]

[F]

[E]

[A]

[A]


3-10

10. Flat cable bracket [G] (! x 1)

11. Cable (clamps [H])

12. Duct [I]

13. Laser optics housing unit (! x 2)NOTE: Hold the unit with both hands

and slowly lift up.

14. After reinstalling the laser opticshousing unit, do some adjustments (☛the procedures on the following page).

G060R208.WMF

G060R209.WMF

[I]

[H]

[G]

23 February, 2001 LASER OPTICS

3-11

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit

1. Enter SP mode.

2. Input the values printed on three decals on the new laser optics housing unitinto the following SPs. Each decal contains two values.

Value on the left Value on the right FunctionDecal 1 SP2-109-3 SP2-109-2 Laser beam pitchDecal 2 SP2-994-4 SP2-994-3 Main-scan registration

correction for black and cyanDecal 3 SP2-994-2 SP2-994-1 Main-scan registration

correction for magenta andyellow

3. Print out the following test pattern (17: cross-stitch main-scan) with SP5-997.

4. Check these test patterns. If the laser beam pitch is not correct, vertical blackstrips seem to appear.• Cross-stitch pattern: The thin lines should be of uniform thickness (no striping

effect should appear on the printout).

5. Adjust the laser beam pitch values in SP2-109-2 and -3 until the printout iscorrect, as shown below.

6. Execute SP5-993-2 or “Auto Adjust” with the Maintenance menu in the usertools.

Jp:xxxxx KC:-2,-2

CK

G060R004.WMF

Jp:xxxxx MY:-2,-2

YM

G060R006.WMF

Jp:xxxxx P:46,41

1200dpi600dpi

G060R005.WMF

G060R002.WMF

Decal 1 Decal 2 Decal 3

Feed direction

Adjustment not completed Adjustment completed


3-12

3.4.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

1. Laser optics housing unit (☛ 3.4.2LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT)

2. Cover [A] (! x 4)

3. Polygon mirror motor [B] (! x 4 and" x 1)

3.4.4 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS

1. Laser optics housing unit (☛ 3.4.2LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT)

2. Synchronizing detector boards [A](! x 1, " x 2)

G060R210.WMF

G060R211.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

23 February, 2001 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT

3-13

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.5 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT

NOTE: Do not touch the PCU development drum. Do not let any metal objecttouch the PCU development sleeve.

1. Open the front cover [A].

2. To raise the drum positioning plate [B],loosen the 2 screws.

3. Turn the release lever [C] counter-clockwise.

4. Pull the required development unit [D]out.

5. Install a new development unit.

6. Check that the development units areinstalled in the proper color order(black → yellow → cyan → magentamoving from left to right).NOTE: When the main switch is turned

on, the newly installeddevelopment units areautomatically initialized.

7. Release the lever and pull the PCU [E]out until the handle appears.

8. Grasp the handle [F] and pull the PCUout of the machine.

G060R301.WMF

G060R302.WMF

G060R303.WMF

[A]

[D]

[E]

[B]

[C]

[F]

PAPER FEED 23 February, 2001

3-14

3.6 PAPER FEED

3.6.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

Tray 1 and Tray 2

1. Tray 1 and Tray 2

2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)

3. Feed roller [B] (# x 1)

4. Separation roller [C] (# x 1)

By-pass Tray

1. Open the right door.

2. By-pass tray cover [A] (1 hook, ! x 1)

3. Raise the paper end sensor actuator.

4. Pick-up roller [B] (1 hook)

5. Feed roller [C] (# x 1)

6. Separation roller [D] (# x 1)

G060R101.WMF

G060R102.WMF

G060R110.WMF

[A]

[C][A]

[B]

[B]

[C]

[D]

23 February, 2001 PAPER FEED

3-15

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.6.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD

1. Open the by-pass tray.

2. Center the side fences [A].

3. By-pass tray cover [B] (! x 2, 2 hooks)

4. There is a square hole [C] on each side of the tray. Insert a screwdriver intoeach of the holes.

5. Paper width detection board [D] (! x 1, " x 1)

3.6.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR


2. Vertical transport cover [A] (! x 4)

3. Vertical transport sensor [B] (" x 1)

G060R103.WMF

G060R104.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[A]

[D]

[B]


3-16

3.6.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT

1. Rear cover (☛ 3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS)

2. Upper rear cover (☛ 3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS)

3. Upper right cover (☛ 3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS)

4. Right rear cover [A] (! x 4)


6. Lift the vertical transport unit [B] to remove it from its hinges (" x 3).

G060R106.WMFG060R105.WMF

[A]

[B]


3-17

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.6.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSOR

1. Right door unit (☛ 3.6.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT)

2. Registration guide [A] (! x 2)

3. Registration sensor [B] (! x 2, " x 1)

4. Relay sensor [C] (" x 1)

3.6.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

1. Paper Trays

2. Rear cover (☛3.3 EXTERIORCOVERS)

3. Swing out the high voltage supplyunit (☛3.9.2 MOVING THE HIGHVOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, BOUT OF THE WAY).

4. Clutch holder [A] (! x 2, 1 bearing)

5. Paper feed clutch for tray 1 [B] ("x 1)

6. Clutch holder [C] (! x 2, 1 bearing)

7. Paper feed clutch for tray 2 [D] ("x 1)


G060R713.WMF

[D] [C]

[A]

[B]

[B]

[A][C]


3-18

3.6.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH

1. Right door unit (☛3.6.4RIGHT DOOR UNIT)

2. By-pass tray cover [A] (! x 1,1 hook)

3. Loosen the screw on the rightdoor latch.

4. Turn the latch the oppositedirection.

5. Upper guide plate [B] (! x 4)

6. Support plate [C] ($ x 2)

7. Relay gear [D] (1 hook)

8. By-pass feed clutch [E] (" x 1)

3.6.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR


2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit. (☛ 3.9.2 MOVING THE HIGHVOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, B OUT OF THE WAY)

3. Tray lift motors (tray 1 [A], tray 2 [B]) (! x 2, " x 1)

G060R107.WMF

G060R712.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[A]

[B]

[E]

23 February, 2001 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3-19

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.7 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.7.1 TRANSFER UNIT

NOTE: When removing or installing the transfer unit, grasp the central areas of thefront and rear frame. Do not touch the transfer belt [C]. Do not damage theentrance mylar [D].

1. Turn the release lever counterclockwise. (☛ 3.5 PCU AND DEVELOPMENTUNIT)

2. Pull out the transfer unit [A] until the entire unit is visible.

3. Bracket [B]

4. Grasp the transfer unit as shown above. Lift the unit to remove it.

After replacing the transfer unit, execute SP3-920-5 (refresh mode).

G060R404.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT 23 February, 2001

3-20

3.7.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT

1. Turn the lever counterclockwise (☛ 3.5 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT).

2. Pull out the transfer unit until the entire unit is visible.

3. Transfer cleaning unit [A] (! x 1, 3 pins).

After replacing the transfer belt cleaning unit, execute SP3-920-5 (refresh mode).

G060R402.WMF

[A]


3-21

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.7.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER

1. Front gear [A] ($ x1, 1 bearing)

2. Rear gear [B] (1 hook, 1 bearing)

3. Cleaning bias roller [C]

4. Drive gear [D]

5. Cams [E] (1 spring)

6. Cleaning blade [F] (1 bearing)

After replacing the cleaning blade, execute SP3-920-5 (refresh mode).

G060R403.WMF

[E]

[A]

[F]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT 23 February, 2001

3-22

3.7.4 TRANSFER BELT

NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt during handling. When replacing the belt,hold the belt at its end.

1. Transfer unit (☛ 3.7.1TRANSFER UNIT)

2. Transfer cleaning unit (☛ 3.7.2TRANSFER BELT CLEANINGUNIT)

3. High voltage wire [A] (! x 1, " x1)

4. Transfer entrance guide [B] (! x2)

5. Right bracket [C] (! x 2, 1 groundwire holder)

6. Unhook the gear [D] (1 bushing)

7. Belt-holder plate [E] ($ x 1, 1spring [F], 1 bushing)

CAUTION: Be careful that the springdoes not jump out whenremoving or reinstalling.

G060R406.WMF

G060R407.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

[D][E]

[F]


3-23

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

8. Transfer exit unit [G] (! x 1, 1 stepscrew)

9. Left bracket [H] (! x 2, " x 1, 1ground wire holder)

10. Lay the transfer unit on its side. Grasp the upperend of the transfer belt and pull the transfer belt[I] up and out.

11. When reinstalling the belt, check that the endwith the belt-lot number comes to the rear side ofthe machine.

After replacing the transfer belt, execute SP3-920-5(refresh mode).

G060R408.WMF

G060R409.WMF

[H]

[G]

[I]

FUSING 23 February, 2001

3-24

3.8 FUSING

!CAUTION1. Be careful when handling the fusing unit. It is very hot.2. Take care not to spill silicone oil.

3.8.1 FUSING UNIT

1. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed.

2. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.

3. Fusing unit [A]

After replacing the fusing unit, optimize the line speed for fusing unit by adjustingthe speed of development motor-K with the Maintenance menu in the user tools“Menu/Maintenance/Color Regist./Fuser Adjust/At Unit Replace”.This mode is automatically required after the machine detects a new fusing unit isinstalled. Refer to Maintenance Guide 1 of the Operating Instructions for how toadjust this.

G060R508.WMF

[A]

23 February, 2001 FUSING

3-25

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.8.2 OIL SUPPLY UNIT

1. Detach the finisher from the printer if it is installed.

2. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.

3. Fusing unit (☛ 3.8.1 FUSING UNIT)

4. Oil supply Unit [A]

3.8.3 PAPER EXIT

1. Paper exit cover (☛ 3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS)

2. Exit upper limit sensor cover [A] (! x 2)

3. Exit upper limit sensor [B]

4. Paper exit sensor [C]

G060R509.WMF

G060R601.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

[A]

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 23 February, 2001

3-26

3.9 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.9.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY


2. Connector cover [A] (! x 1)

3. Four flat cables [B]

4. Connector [C]

5. Swing out the controller box [D] (! x 4).NOTE: When the controller box is swung out, free-run tests can still be done.

However, because the LD cables are disconnected, no output appears.

3.9.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, B OUT OF THE WAY


2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit[A] (! x 2).


G060R711.WMF

[B]

[C][A]

[D]

[A]

23 February, 2001 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3-27

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.9.3 CONTROLLER AND BCU

NOTE: After replacing the BCU or controller, remove the NVRAM on the old boardand install it on the new board.

1. Controller [A] (! x 2)

2. Option bracket [B] (! x 2)

3. Rear cover [C] (☛3.3 EXTERIORCOVERS)

4. Cover bracket [D] (! x 3)

5. Inner bracket [E] (! x 2)

6. Connector cover [F] (! x 1)

7. BCU [G] (! x 8, " x 23)

NOTE: After replacing the BCU or controller,remove the NVRAM on the old boardand install it on the new board. If theNVRAM on the old board is defective,replace the NVRAM (☛ 3.9.4 NVRAMREPLACEMENT PROCEDURE).

G060R701.WMF

G060R702.WMF

G060R703.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 23 February, 2001

3-28

3.9.4 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Make sure you have the SMC report (factory settings) that comes with the printerbefore beginning the following procedure.

NVRAM for BCU

1. Enter SP mode and print out the SMC reports with SP5-990 if possible.

2. Turn off the main switch and unplug the power cord.

3. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.

4. Execute the RAM clear for engine settings with SP5-801-2.

5. Contact your supervisor to enter the machine’s device number.

6. Reset the settings for meter charge with SP5-930-1 to -5.

7. Enter the SP mode changes at the factory and the field.

NVRAM for Controller



3. Replace the NVRAM on the controller and reassemble the machine.

4. Execute the RAM clear for controller settings and counters with SP5-801-3, -8,-11, and SP7-808-1.


NVRAMs for both BCU and Controller



3. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and the controller, and reassemble themachine.

4. Execute the RAM clear with SP5-801-1 and SP7-808-1.

5. Contact your supervisor to enter the machine’s device number.

6. Reset the settings for meter charge with SP5-930-1 to -5.


Ricoh Technical Services

After replacing the controller NVRAM, reset the total counter to 0 (SP 7-825-1) if meter charge mode (SP 5-930-1) is enabled.

23 February, 2001 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3-29

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.9.5 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B


2. High voltage supply board [A] (! x 6, " x 16)

3.9.6 PSU

1. Left cover (☛3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS)

2. PSU [A] (! x 5, " x 12)NOTE: Check that the interlock switches on the PSU work normally after

reinstalling the PSU (open/close the left and front doors).

G060R710.WMF

G060R715.WMF

[A]

[A]

DRIVE UNIT 23 February, 2001

3-30

3.10 DRIVE UNIT

3.10.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH


2. Swing out the controller box (☛ 3.3.1Controller Box).

3. Registration clutch [A] (# x1, " x 1)

3.10.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES


2. Swing out the controller box (☛ 3.3.1Controller Box).

3. Drum motor plate [A] (! x 5)

4. CMYK drum gear [B] (! x 4)

5. Drive gear [C]

6. Timing belt [D]

7. Drive gear [E]

8. Color development clutch securingplate [F] (! x 8, " x 4)

9. Development clutch - K [G]

10. Development clutch - Y [H]

11. Development clutch - C [I]

12. Development clutch - M [J]

G060R706.WMF

G060R707.WMF

G060R708.WMF

[A]

[D]

[A]

[B] [E]

[C]

[F]

[G][H]

[I][J]

23 February, 2001 DRIVE UNIT

3-31

Re

pla

ce

me

nt

Ad

just

men

t

3.10.3 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - CMY


2. Color development clutch securing plate (☛ 3.10.2 DEVELOPMENTCLUTCHES)

3. Development drive motor - CMY [A] (! x 5, " x 3, 1 spring)

3.10.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K


2. Color development clutch securing plate (☛ 3.10.2 DEVELOPMENTCLUTCHES)

3. Drum drive motor - CMY [A] (! x 2, " x 1)

4. Drum drive motor - K [B] (! x 2, " x 1)

G060R709.WMF

G060R725.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

DRIVE UNIT 23 February, 2001

3-32

3.10.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K


2. Upper rear cover (☛ 3.3 EXTERIOR COVERS)

3. Development clutch-CMYK (☛ 3.10.2DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES)

4. Fusing fan duct [A] (! x 1, " x 1)

5. Right duct [B] (! x 1)

6. Upper duct [C] (! x 2)

7. Black development clutch securingplate (☛ 3.10.3 DEVELOPMENTDRIVE MOTOR - CMY

8. Development drive motor – K [D] (!x 4, " x 1)

G060R718.WMF

G060R721.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

23 February, 2001 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

4-1

Tro

ub

le-

sh

oo

tin

g

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT

SP-3-005-006 (Developer Initialization Result)

No. Result Description Possible Causes Action

1

Successfullycompleted

Developerinitialization issuccessfullycompleted.

- -

1. Shielding tape is notremoved.

1. Remove the shieldingtape to supplydeveloper to the unit.

2. Development unit is notfirmly installed, causingpoor connection of the TDsensor connector.

2. Reinstall thedevelopment unit.2

Failure Vt cannot beadjusted within 3.0± 0.1V.

3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace thedevelopment unit.

4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT

SP3-975-001 (Process Control Self-check Result)


1

Successfullycompleted

Process controlself-checksuccessfullycompleted.

1. Dirty ID sensor (toner,dust, or foreign material)

1. Clean the ID sensor.

2. Dirty transfer belt 2. Check the beltcleaning, and clean orreplace the transferbelt.

3. Scratched or damagedtransfer belt

3. Replace the transferbelt.

2

ID sensoradjustmenterror

Vsg cannot beadjusted within 4.0± 0.5V.

4. Defective ID sensor 4. Replace the IDsensor.

3

Vmin error Vmin is not withinthe specifiedrange.

Vmin is calculated during the self-check. Even when thecalculated Vmin value is out of the specified range, anoptimum value is automatically used instead. Therefore,this error code does not usually occur.

PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS 23 February, 2001

4-2


4Samplingdata error

Not enough datacan be sampled.

5

Gammaerror

Gamma is out ofrange.0.3 > Gamma, or6.0 < Gamma

6

Vk error Vk is out of range.-150 > Vk or 150 <Vk

1. ID sensor pattern densityis too high or low.

2. Residual image ontransfer belt

3. Toner dropped fromdevelopment unit

4. Scratched or damagedtransfer belt

1. Check the imagedevelopment processand correct tonerdensity if necessary.

2. Check the transfer beltcleaning unit.

3. Clean the developmentunit and correct tonerdensity.

4. Replace the transferbelt.

1. Development unit notproperly installed.

1. Check.

2. Toner density is too low orhigh.

2. Check and/or correcttoner density.

7

Vt error Vt is out of range.0.5 > Vt or 4.8 < Vt

3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace developmentunit.

8

Samplingdata errorduring LDpowercorrection

Not enough datacan be sampledduring the LDpower correction (ifSP3-125-002 is setto “2”).

See the possible causes and action for error codes 4, 5,and 6.

9Forcedtermination

Process controlself-check wasforcibly terminated.

A cover was opened or themain switch was turned offduring the self-check.

4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT

SP5-993-007 (Line Position Adjustment Result)

No. Result Description Note

01Successfullycompleted

Data sampling was correctly done and lineposition adjustment was successfully completed.

02Out of adjustmentrange (over ±2mm)

The calculated result for line position correction isgreater than ±2 mm.

03Calculation Error Distance between the lines is greater than ±2

mm.04 Sampling Error Data sampling cannot be done properly.

05Descending slopeerror (See Note 1)

06Ascending slopeerror

The ascending or descending slope of the IDsensor signal wave is out of specification.

(See Note 1)

07Pattern linesmismatch (lessthan 64 lines)

The detected number of pattern lines is less than64. (See Note 1)

08Sampling time-out Data sampling cannot be done within the

allocated time.

09Sampling starterror

The start mark cannot be detected within theallocated time.

10Pattern lengthmismatch

The pattern length is shorter or longer thanspecified. (See Note 1)

23 February, 2001 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

4-3

Tro

ub

le-

sh

oo

tin

g

No. Result Description Note

11Pattern linesmismatch (over 64lines)

The detected number of pattern lines is over 64.

12Magnificationmismatch

The calculated magnification value does notmatch any data in the laser power frequencyadjustment data table.

13Toner condition The machine is in the toner near-end or toner end

condition.

17Not executed The machine is not ready to do the line position

adjustment manually from the user menu.

18Potential controlerror

Line position adjustment cannot be done due tofailed potential control.

Note 1: Concerning the error codes (05, 06, 07 or 10) which stop sampling datawhen either the front or rear ID sensor detect an error, the machine maydisplay the error code for both ID sensors in some cases.

Possible causes of errors in the line position adjustment

Possible CausePossible

Error CodeAction

The pattern does not reach the proper density.

1. Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, orforeign material)

1. Clean the ID sensors.

2. Incorrect toner densityLow: ID sensor cannot detect thepattern lines.High: Lines may be partially blankdue to improper toner densityand/or paper transfer current.

2. Correct the toner density.

1

3. Incorrect transfer current

04, 05, 06, 07,08, 09, 10

3. Correct the transfer current.The ID sensors are affected by electrical noise or dirt/damage on the transfer belt.1. Scratched or damaged OPC drum 1. Replace PCU2. Scratched or damaged transfer

belt2. Replace transfer belt

3. Dirty transfer belt 3. Clean or replace transfer belt4. High voltage leak in transfer unit 4. Fix the high voltage leak5. Residual image on transfer belt 5. Check transfer belt cleaning and

clean the belt6. Toner dropped from development

unit6. Clean the development unit and

adjust the toner density

2

7. Carrier dropped fromdevelopment unit

02, 03, 04, 05,06, 10, 11, 12

7. Clean the development unit andadjust the toner density

The transfer belt is covered with toner.3Development does not work properly. All error codes Check all units and high voltage

cable connectors.None of the patterns are developed.4Development does not work properly. 09, 04 Check all units and high voltage

cable connectors.

PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS 23 February, 2001

4-4

Possible CausePossible

Error CodeAction

Some of the patterns are not developed;5Development does not work properly. 07, 08 Check all units and high voltage

cable connectors.The machine is not in the condition to execute the line position adjustment;The machine is in the toner near endor end condition.

13 Replenish toner.

The machine is not ready to do theline position adjustment manually fromthe user menu.

17 Wait until machine becomes theready condition from the energysaver or auto off mode.

6

Line position adjustment cannot bedone due to failed potential control.

18 Fix the problem causing the potentialcontrol error.

The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (1)7No error code is displayed. However,the machine keeps displaying“execution” on the screen.In addition, the green LED on theBICU stays on or off under thefollowing condition.1. The MUSIC CPU resets due to

electrical noise generated by ahigh voltage leak on a damagedOPC drum.

-

1. Fix the bias leak and/or replacePCU

The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (2)8No error code is displayed. However,the machine keeps displaying“execution” on the screen.The green LED on the BICU keepsblinking faintly (this is normal) evenunder one of the following conditions.1. Poor connection between the

toner cartridge detection boardand the memory chip on the tonercartridge

2. The memory chip on the tonercartridge fails.

-

1. Check the connection betweenthe detection board and memorychip.

2. Replace the toner cartridge.

23 February, 2001 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4-5

Tro

ub

le-

sh

oo

tin

g

4.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.2.1 SUMMARY

There are 2 levels of service call conditions.

Level Definition Reset Procedure

A

Fusing unit SCs displayed on theoperation panel. The machine is disabled.The user cannot reset the SC.

Turn the main switch off then onbefore entering SP mode. Resetthe SC (set SP5-810 to 1), thenturn the main switch off then onagain.

B

Turning the operation switch or mainpower switch off then on resets the SC.Displayed on the operation panel. Re-displayed if they occurred after the mainpower switch is turned on again.

Turn the operation switch ormain power switch off and on.

All SCs are logged.

• The number of SC codes detected can be checked with SP7-902.• Printing logging data (SP5-990-004) in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC

codes detected and total counters when the SC code is detected.

NOTE: 1) If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect thenreconnect the connectors before replacing the PCBs.

2) If the problem concerns a motor lock, first check the mechanical loadbefore replacing motors or sensors.

SC Classification

SC codes are classified by section as shown in the following table:Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section

1XX Scanning 190 - Unique for a specific model200 - Polygon motor220 - Synchronization control230 - FGATE signal related240 - LD control260 - Magnification

2XX

Laser exposure

280 - Unique for a specific model300 - Charge330 - Drum potential350 - Development

3XX

Image development 1

380 - Unique for a specific model400 - Image transfer420 - Paper separation430 - Cleaning440 - Around drum460 - Unit

4XX

Image development 2

480 - Others500 - Paper feed515 - Duplex5XX

Paper feed / Fusing

520 - Paper transport

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS 23 February, 2001

4-6

Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section530 - Fan motor540 - Fusing560 - Others

5XX

Paper feed / Fusing

570 - Unique for a specific model600 - Electrical counters620 - Mechanical counters630 - Account control640 - CSS650 - Network670 - Internal data processing

6XX

Communication

680 - Unique for a specific model700 - Original handling710 -730 - Mail box740 - Finisher750 - Stapler (1)760 - Stapler (2)

7XX

Peripherals

780 - Unique for a specific model800 - Error after ready condition820 - Diagnostics error860 - Hard disk

8XX

Controller

880 - Unique for a specific model900 - Counter920 - Memory9XX

Others

990 - Others

23 February 2001 SC TABLE

4-7

4.3 SC TABLE

SC No. Item Definition Possible CauseRelated

SCsTroubleshooting Procedure Type

SC195 Serial NumberMismatch

• Serial number stored in thememory does not consist ofthe correct code.

• EEPROM defective• BCU replaced without

original EEPROM

Open the front cover and turn on themain switch. Check the serial numberwith SP5-811-002.If the stored serial number is incorrect,contact your product specialist fordetails of how to solve the problem.

SC201 Polygon motorerror

• The polygon mirror motordoes not reach the targetedoperating speed within 15seconds after turning on.

• The lock signal does notbecome low within 15seconds after turning off thepolygon motor. .

• Polygon mirror motorerror

• Abnormal GAVDbehavior

• Cable disconnection

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the cables.3. Replace the polygon motor.

SC220 Synch.detectionsignal error 1220-001: Y220-002: M220-003: C220-004: K0220-005: K1

The front (for K&Y) or rear (forC&M) laser synchronizingdetector board, which is usedto determine the start timing oflaser writing, does not send asignal while the polygon motoris operating normally and theLD is on.

• Disconnection of thecable between front(K&Y) or rear (C&M)synchronizingdetector board andthe LD unit

• Incorrect installationof front (K&Y) or rear(C&M) synchronizingdetector board (thebeam does not targetthe photo detector.)

• Defective LD unit• Defective BCU

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the cable connection between

front (for K&Y) or rear (for C&M)synchronizing detector board and theLD unit.

3. Check or reinstall the front (for K&Y)or rear (for C&M) synchronizingdetector board.

4. Replace the front (for K&Y) or rear(for C&M) synchronizing detectorboard.

5. Replace the LD unit.6. Replace the BCU.

SC TABLE 23 February 2001

4-8



SC 221 Synch.detectionsignal error 2221-001: Y221-002: M221-003: C221-004: K

Main scan length detection isnot properly completed tenconsecutive times.

The front (for C&M) or rear (forK&Y) laser synchronizingdetector boards are used forthe main scan lengthdetection, which automaticallycorrects the main-scanmagnification.

• Damaged ordisconnected cablebetween front (C&M)or rear (K&Y) lasersynchronizingdetector board andthe LD unit

• Incorrect installationof front (C&M) or rear(K&Y) synchronizingdetector board (thebeam does not targetthe photo detector.)

• Defective front (C&M)or rear (K&Y)synchronizingdetector board

• Defective LD unit

After doing any of the following, print tenjobs or more to see if the same SC codeis displayed:1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check or replace the cable

connecting front (for C&M) or rear (forK&Y) synchronizing detector boardand the LD unit.

3. Check or reinstall the front (for C&M)or rear (for K&Y) synchronizingdetector board.

4. Replace the front (for C&M) or rear(for K&Y) synchronizing detectorboard.

5. Replace the LD unit.6. Replace the BCU.If a synch. detector board cannot bereplaced, do the following as atemporary measure:• Disable main scan length detection

(SP 2-919-001)


4-9



SC 230 FGATE error230-001: Y230-002: M230-003: C230-004: K

The BCU generates theFGATE signal based on theregistration sensor ON timing.Then, it sends the signal to theLD units. The LD units send afeedback signal to the BCU.When the LD units startemitting laser beams, thefeedback signal changes fromHigh to Low.

The SC code is generatedwhen the BCU receives nofeedback signal (stays High)from the LD unit 1 second afterpaper reaches the positionwhere the laser should startwriting.

• Poor connectionbetween BCU and LDunits

• Defective BCU• Defective LD unit

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the cables between the LD

units and the BCU.3. Replace the LD unit.4. Replace the BCU.

SC 231 FGATEtimeout231-001: Y231-002: M231-003: C231-004: K

When LD units emit laserbeams to print a job, thefeedback signal stays Low andbecomes High after laserexposure for a page iscompleted. The SC code isdetected in the followingcases:• When the feedback signal

stays Low 7 seconds aftercompleting the laserexposure, or

• When the feedback signalstays Low until the laserexposure timing for the nextpage in multi-page printmode.

• Poor connectionbetween BCU and LDunits

• Defective BCU• Defective LD unit

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the cables between the LD

units and the BCU.3. Replace the LD unit.4. Replace the BCU.


4-10



SC 240 LD over240-001: Y240-002: M240-003: C240-004: K

The power supply for the LDunit exceeds 67 mA.

• LD worn out(current/light outputcharacteristics havechanged.)

• LD broken (shortcircuit)

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the LD unit.

SC 260 LD HP sensornot switchedon (for K only)

During homing, it takes morethan five seconds to switch theHP sensor on (the sensoractuator does not cover thesensor).

• Defective motor• Defective sensor• Mechanical problem

when switching theactuator

• Brown fuse (FU81) onthe Power supply unit

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the sensor actuator position of

the LD positioning motor.3. Replace the LD positioning motor.4. Replace the LD home position

sensor.5. Check and/or replace the PSU.

SC 261 LD HP sensornot switchedoff (for K only)

After the laser beam pitch waschanged, it takes more thanfive seconds for the HP sensorto switch off.

• Defective motor• Defective sensor• Mechanical problem

when switching theactuator

• Brown fuse (FU81) onthe Power supply unit

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the sensor actuator position of

the LD positioning motor.3. Replace the LD positioning motor.4. Replace the LD home position

sensor.5. Check and/or replace the PSU.


4-11



SC 285 Line positionadjustment(MUSIC) error

Line position adjustment failsthree consecutive times.

• Pattern samplingerror due toinsufficient imagedensity of patternsused for theadjustment

• Inconsistency in thesampling line positionadjustment patterndue to dust on thepattern, damage tothe OPC drum,damage or tonerdropped on thetransfer belt, or a dirtyor defective ID sensor

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check and fix the problem that

causes low image density. .3. Clean or replace the transfer belt

and/or the ID sensor.4. Replace the PCU or clean the

development unit that causes toner todrop on the transfer belt.

SC 370 TD sensor [K]:Adjustmenterror

SC 371 TD sensor [Y]:Adjustmenterror

SC 372 TD sensor [C]:Adjustmenterror

SC 373 TD sensor [M]: Adjustmenterror

During the developerinitialization, the output valueof the TD sensor is without theadjustment range (3.0 ± 0.1V).

• Poor connection (TDsensor outputs is lessthan 0.5V.)

• Defective TD sensor

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Reset the related color development

unit.3. Replace the related color

development unit.

SC 374 Vt error [K]SC 375 Vt error [Y]SC 376 Vt error [C]SC 377 Vt error [M]

During the imagedevelopment, Vt value is lessthan 0.5V.

• Poor connection (TDsensor outputs is lessthan 0.5V.)

• Defective TD sensor

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Reset the related color development

unit.3. Replace the related color

development unit.


4-12



SC 380 Blackdevelopmentmotor error

SC 381 Colordevelopmentmotor error

When the motor speed iswithin the target level, themotor sends a lock signal(High to Low at CN214-5) tothe BCU.SC380 is detected under thefollowing conditions:• The Lock signal stays High

2 seconds after the motorturns on.

• The Lock signal stays Low 2seconds after the motorturns off.

• The Lock signal stays Highfor more than 2 secondswhile the motor is on.

• Defective motor• Defective BCU

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the motor.3. Replace the BCU.

SC 385 ID sensor VSGadjustmenterror

Vsg is the out of adjustmentrange during a process controlself-check.

Adjustment range:4.0 ± 0.5V

• Defective ID sensor• Dirty ID sensor• ID sensor

disconnected• Dirty drum (cleaning

incomplete)

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Clean the ID sensor and adjacent

parts.3. Check the drum cleaning condition.4. Check the ID sensor connector.5. Replace the ID sensor.

SC 386 Developmentgamma error K

SC 387 Developmentgamma error Y

SC 388 Developmentgamma errorC

SC 389 Developmentgamma errorM

Any of the following conditionshappens three consecutivetimes:• When the development

gamma is out of thefollowing range:0.3 ≤ γ ≥ 6.0

• When Vk is out of thefollowing range:-150V ≤ Vk ≥ 150V

• Development gammacalculation error

• Unsuitable tonerdensity

• Toner supplymechanism problem

• Laser exposureproblem

• Image transferproblem

1. Turn the main switch off and on .2. Check the process control self-check

result (SP3-975). If the result is not“1”, fix the problem according to thetable in section 4.1.2.

3. Print a full color image by disablingSC detection (SP5-809-001) andcheck if the image quality is OK. If theimage quality is not OK, fix theproblem. Then, enable the SCdetection again.


4-13



SC 390 DevelopmentBias outputerror

The high voltage supply board(C/B) monitors the circuit anddetects abnormal conditionssuch as a voltage leak or nooutput condition. If thishappens, the high voltagesupply board sends an errorsignal (High to Low at CN204-A18) to the BCU.

The BCU monitors this signalevery 2 ms and generates thisSC code when the errorcondition occurs 250consecutive times.

• Loose connection• Defective power pack

C/B output• Damaged cable• Defective

development unit• Defective BCU

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the harness and cables are

properly connected.3. Disconnect the high voltage supply

cables from the bias terminals on thehigh voltage supply board C/B.Measure the DC voltage using amulti-meter.• Replace the high voltage supply

board if no voltage is supplied.4. If the result is OK at step 2, check if

the high voltage supply cable ordevelopment unit is grounded.• Replace the high voltage supply

cable if it damages.• Replace the development unit if it

damages.5. Check the PWM signals are sent to

the high voltage supplied board fromthe BCU. Replace the BCU orharness between the BCU and highvoltage supply board if the voltage is0.

SC 391-01

Charge AC:output error391-01: K391-02: Y391-03: M391-04: C

The high voltage supply boardsends the feedback signal(CN228-2 to 5; MCYK). TheBCU monitors these feedbacksignals every 8 ms. If theaverage of the sampled data isnot within the control target 30consecutive times, this SCcode is generated.

• Power packdisconnected

• Charge receptacle orterminal

• Defective PCU biasinput terminal

• Incorrect power packB/C output

• Damaged cable• Defective BCU

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the connector.3. Check the PCU charge voltage input

(the spring/conducting shaft) orreplace the PCU.

4. Replace the power pack B/C.5. Replace the cable.6. Replace the BCU.


4-14



SC 460-001

Thermistor 1error (opencircuit)

When the temperaturedetected by thermistor 1,which is at the left (fusing unit)side of the laser optics unit, isless than -30°C for 10 secondsconsecutively, the BCUdetermines that the circuit isopened and displays this SCcode..

• Thermistor 1defective

• Cable connectionerror

• BCU defect

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the cable connections.3. Replace the thermistor.4. Replace the BCU.

SC 460-002

Thermistor 1error (shortcircuit)

When the temperaturedetected by the thermistor 1,which is at the left (fusing unit)side of the laser optics unit, ishigher than 70°C for 10seconds consecutively, theBCU determines that thecircuit is shorted and displaysthis SC code



• BCU defect


SC 461-001

Thermistor 2error (opencircuit)

When the temperaturedetected by the thermistor 2,which is at the right (paperfeed section) side of the laseroptics unit, is less than -30°Cfor 10 seconds consecutively,the BCU determines that thecircuit is opened and displaysthis SC code.



• BCU defect



4-15



SC 461-002

Thermistor 2error (shortcircuit)

When the temperaturedetected by the thermistor 2,which is at the right (paperfeed section) side of the laseroptics unit, is higher than 70°Cfor 10 seconds consecutively,the BCU determines that thecircuit is shorted and displaysthis SC code



• BCU defect


SC 471 Transfer beltH.P. error

The transfer belt HP sensorsignal does not change fromLow to High (home position) orvice versa 1 second after thetransfer belt contact motorturns on.

• Transfer belt unit notset properly

• Defective transfer beltH.P. sensor and/ortransfer belt setsensor

• Defective transfer beltcontact motor

• Transfer belt unitproblem

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Reset the transfer belt unit.3. Clean or replace the transfer belt H.P.

sensor and/or transfer belt set sensor.4. Replace the transfer belt contact

motor.5. Check the contact and release

mechanism of the transfer belt unit.

SC 490 Transfer bias /paperattraction rollerbias leak error

The high voltage supply board(T/PA/CL) monitors the circuitand detects current leaks. Ifthis happens, the high voltagesupply board sends a SCsignal (High to Low at CN213-8) to the BCU.

The BCU monitors this signalevery 2 ms and generates thisSC code when the errorcondition occurs 250consecutive times.

• Defective highvoltage supply board(T/PA/CL)

• Damaged transferbelt

• Transfer unit

• Damaged highvoltage supply cables

• Damaged cablesbetween the BCU andhigh voltage supplyboard

• Defective BCU

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the transfer unit and replace

the belt and/or the transfer unit if anydamage is found.

3. Replace the high voltage supplyboard (T/PA/CL).

4. Check and/or replace the high voltagesupply cables.

5. Check and/or replace the dc cablesbetween the BCT and high voltagesupply board.

6. Replace the BCU.


4-16



SC 501 Paper Tray 1error

SC 502 Paper Tray 2error

When the tray lift motor isturned on, if the upper limit isnot detected within 10seconds, the machine asks theuser to reset the tray. If thiscondition occurs threeconsecutive times, the SC isgenerated.

• Defective paper liftsensor

• Defective tray liftmotor

• Defective bottomplate lift mechanism

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the bottom plate smoothly

moves up and down manually.3. Check and/or replace the paper lift

sensor.4. Check and/or replace the tray lift

motor.


4-17



SC 503-01

Tray 3 error(Paper FeedUnit or LCT)

For the paper feed unit:When the tray lift motor isturned on, if the upper limit isnot detected within 18seconds, the machine asks theuser to reset the tray. If thiscondition occurs threeconsecutive times, the SC isgenerated.

For the LCT:This SC is generated underthe following conditions:• If the upper or lower limit is

not detected within 15seconds when the tray liftmotor is turned on to lift upor lower the tray

• If the paper stack is nottransported within a specificnumber of pulses after thetray motor and stacktransport clutch turn on totransport the paper stack

• If the end fence homeposition sensor stays ON fora specific number of pulsesafter the tray motor andstack transport clutch turnon to transport the paperstack.

For the paper feed unit:• Defective tray lift

motor or connectordisconnection

• Defective lift sensoror connectordisconnection

• For the LCT:• Defective stack

transport clutch orconnectordisconnection

• Defective tray motoror connectordisconnection

• Defective end fencehome position sensoror connectordisconnection

• Defective upper limitsensor or connectordisconnection

• Defective tray liftmotor or connectordisconnection

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the cable connections.3. Check and/or replace the defective

component.


4-18



SC 503-02

Tray 3 error(Paper FeedUnit or LCT)

• If the following conditionoccurs 3 consecutive times,this SC is generated.

For the paper feed unit:When the main switch isturned or when the tray is setand if the upper limit is alreadydetected, the lift motor turns onto lower the bottom plate untilthe lift sensor goes off.If the motor turns on for 7seconds or more, the machineasks the user to reset the tray.

For the LCT:When the main switch isturned on or when the LCT isset, if the end fence is not inthe home position (homeposition sensor ON), the traylift motor stops.

For the paper feed unit:• Defective tray lift

motor or connectordisconnection


For the LCT:• Defective stack

transport clutch orconnectordisconnection

• Defective tray motoror connectordisconnection

• Defective end fencehome position sensoror connectordisconnection


component.

SC 504-01

Tray 4 error (3Tray PaperFeed Unit)

When the tray lift motor isturned on, if the upper limit isnot detected within 18seconds, the machine asks theuser to reset the tray. If thiscondition occurs threeconsecutive times, the SC isgenerated.




component.


4-19



SC 504-02

Tray 4 error (3Tray PaperFeed Unit)

When the main switch isturned or when the tray is setand if the upper limit is alreadydetected, the lift motor turns onto lower the bottom plate untilthe lift sensor goes off.If the motor turns on for 7seconds or more, the machineasks the user to reset the tray.If this condition occurs 3consecutive times, this SC isgenerated.




component.

SC 530 Fusing fanmotor error

The BCU does not receive thelock signal (CN210-B5) 5seconds after turning on thefusing fan.

• Defective fusing fanmotor or connectordisconnection

• Defective BCU

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the connector and/or replace

the fusing fan motor.3. Replace the BCU.

SC 541 Heating rollerthermistorerror

The temperature measured bythe heating roller thermistordoes not reach 7 °C for tenseconds.

• Loose connection ofthe heating rollerthermistor

• Defective heatingroller thermistor

• Defective BCU

1. Check if the heating roller thermistoris firmly connected.

2. Replace the fusing unit.3. Replace the BCU.

A

SC 542 Heating rollerwarm-up error

After the main switch is turnedon or the cover is closed, theheating roller temperaturedoes not reach the readytemperature within 60 secondsduring fusing unit warm-up.

• Heating roller fusinglamp broken


• Defective BCU

1. Check if the heating roller thermistoris firmly connected.


A

SC 543 Heating rollerfusing lampoverheat

The detected fusingtemperature stays at 200 °C ormore for five seconds.

• Defective PSU• Defective BCU

1. Replace the PSU.2. Replace the BCU.

A


4-20



SC 544 Heating rollerfusing lamplowtemperatureerror

During stand-by mode or aprint job, the detected heatingroller temperature stays at 50°C or less for five seconds.

• Loose connectionbetween the fusingunit and the mainframe



1. Check the connection between thefusing unit and main frame.

2. Replace the fusing unit.3. Replace the PSU.4. Replace the BCU.

A

SC 545 Heating rollerfusing lampconsecutivefull power

When the fusing unit is notrunning in the Ready condition,the heating roller fusing lampkeeps on with full power for 30consecutive seconds.

• Heating rollerthermistor out ofposition

1. Replace the fusing unit. A

SC 546 Heating rollerfusing lamptemperaturefluctuation

The heating roller temperaturechanges by ±20 °C or more inone second. This occurs threetimes in one minute or twoconsecutive times.

• Loose connection ofthe thermistor

• Loose connectionbetween the fusingunit and main frame

1. Check if the fusing unit is properly setand connected to the main frame.

2. Check if the heating roller thermistorconnector is firmly connected.

3. Replace the fusing unit.

A

SC 551 Pressure rollerthermistorerror

The measured pressure rollertemperature does not reach7°C for 30 seconds.

• Loose connection ofpressure rollerthermistor

• Defective pressureroller thermistor

• Defective BCU

1. Check that the pressure rollerthermistor is firmly connected.


A

SC 552 Pressure rollerwarm-up error

After the main switch is turnedon or the door is closed, thepressure roller temperaturedoes not reach the readytemperature within 150seconds during fusing unitwarm-up.

• Pressure roller fusinglamp broken


• Defective BCU

1. Check if the pressure roller thermistoris firmly connected.


A

SC 553 Pressure rollerfusing lampoverheat

The detected pressure rollertemperature stays at 200 °C ormore for five seconds.



A


4-21



SC 554 Pressure rollerfusing lamplowtemperatureerror

During stand-by mode orprinting, the detected pressureroller temperature stays at 50°C or less for five seconds.

• Loose connectionbetween the fusingunit and the machine



1. Check the connection between thefusing unit and main frame.


A

SC 555 Pressure rollerfusing lampconsecutivefull power

When the fusing unit is notrunning in the Ready condition,the pressure roller fusing lampkeeps ON with full power for100 consecutive seconds.

• Pressure rollerthermistor out ofposition

1. Replace the fusing unit. A

SC 556 Pressure rollerfusing lamptemperaturefluctuation

The pressure rollertemperature changes by ±20°C or more in one second. Thisoccurs three times in oneminute or two consecutivetimes.

• Loose connection ofthe pressure rollerthermistor

• Loose connectionbetween the fusingunit and main frame

1. Check if the fusing unit is properly setand connected to the main frame.

2. Check if the pressure roller thermistorconnector is firmly connected.

3. Replace the fusing unit.

A

SC 560 Zero crosserror

When the main switch isturned on, the machine checkshow many zero-cross signalsare generated during 500 ms.If the number of zero-crosssignal generated is either morethan 66 or less than 45 andwhen this condition is detected10 consecutive times, thiscode is displayed.

• Electrical noise in thesupply from thepower cord

1. Replace the PSU. A


4-22



SC 621 Finisher/mailboxcommunication error

SC 622 Bankcommunication error

• Cable problems• BCU problems• PSU problems in the

machine• Main board problems

in the peripherals

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the cables of peripherals are

properly connected.3. Replace the PSU if no power is

supplied to peripherals.4. Replace the BCU or main board of

peripherals.

SC 623 Duplex unitcommunication error

While the BCU communicateswith an optional unit, an SCcode is displayed if one offollowing conditions occurs.1. The BCU receives a signal

which is generated by theperipherals only just afterthe main switch is turnedon.

2. When the BCU does notreceive an OK signal from aperipheral 100ms aftersending a command to it.The BCU resends thecommand. The BCU doesnot receive an OK signalafter sending the command3 times.

• Cable problems• BCU problems• PSU problems in the

machine• Duplex control board

problem

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the cable of the duplex

inverter unit is properly connected.3. Replace the PSU if no power is

supplied to the peripherals.4. Replace the duplex control board in

the inverter unit.

SC 640 BCU -Controllercommunication error (checksum error)

The check sum of the interfacebetween the BCU andcontroller is not the same.

• Defective controller• Defective PCU

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the controller.3. Replace the BCU.

CTL

SC 641 BCU –Controllercommunication error (noresponse)

The controller does not receiveany response from the BCUthree consecutive times whensending a signal every 100ms.

• Loose connection• Defective controller• Defective BCU

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the connection between the

BCU and controller.3. Replace the controller.4. Replace the BCU.

CTL

SC 670 No responsefrom BCU atpower on

When the main power isturned on or the machinestarts warming up fromenergy-saving mode, thecontroller does not receive acommand signal from theBCU.




CTL


4-23



SC 680 BCU/ MUSICcommunication error

After the engine CPU sends amessage, the Music CPU doesnot respond within fiveseconds three consecutivetimes.

• Toner cartridgememory chip looseconnection

• Memory chip problem• Memory chip cable

wiring problem

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the toner cartridge is

installed correctly.3. Replace the toner cartridge.4. Check if the harnesses are not

damaged.5. Replace the BCU.

SC 687 Memoryaddresscommanderror

The BCU does not receive amemory address commandfrom the controller 60 secondsafter paper is in the position forregistration.


1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the controller is firmly

connected to the BCU.3. Replace the controller.4. Replace the BCU.

SC 722 Finisher joggermotor error

• The jogger fences of thefinisher donot return tohome position within aspecific time.

• The finisher jogger motordoes not leave homeposition within a given time.

• Defective jogger H.P.sensor

• Loose connection• Defective jogger

motor

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the connection of jogger H.P.

sensor and jogger motor connectors3. Replace the jogger H.P. sensor.4. Replace the jogger motor.

SC 724 Finisher staplehammer motorerror

Stapling does not finish within150 ms after the staplehammer motor turns on.

• Staple jam• Loose connection• Overload caused by

stapling too manypages

• Defective staplehammer motor

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the staple hammer motor

connector is properly connected.3. Check if the staple jam occurs.4. Replace the staple hammer motor.

SC 725 Finisher stackfeed-out motorerror

The stack feed-out belt H.P.sensor does not activate withina specified time after the stackfeed-out motor turns on.

• Defective stack feed-out H.P. sensor

• Loose connection• Stack feed-out motor

overload• Defective stack feed-

out motor

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the connectors of the stack

feed-out H.P. sensor and motor areproperly connected.

3. Replace the stack feed-out H.P.sensor.

4. Replace the stack feed-out motor.


4-24



SC 726 Finisher shifttray 1 lift motorerror

• The upper stack height 1sensor is activatedconsecutively (detectingpaper) for 15 seconds afterthe shift tray starts movingup.

• The upper stack heightsensor 1 is deactivatedconsecutively (not detectingpaper) for 15 seconds afterthe shift tray starts movingdown.

• When the upper tray movesfrom lower paper exit to theupper paper exit, the upperstack height 1 sensor isactivated.

• Loose connection• Defective upper stack

height 1 sensor• Defective shift tray 1

lift motor• Motor overload

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the connectors of the sensor

and motor are properly connected.3. Replace the upper stack height 1

sensor.4. Replace the shift tray 1 lift motor.

SC 727 Finisherstapler rotationmotor error

The stapler cannot return to itshome position within aspecified time after the staplerrotation motor starts rotating.

• Loose connection• Defective stapler

rotation motor• Motor overload

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the stapler rotation motor

connector is properly connected.3. Replace the stapler rotation motor.

SC 729 Finisher punchmotor error

The punch home position isnot detected within 250 msafter the punch clutch turns on.

• Loose connection• Defective punch H.P.

sensor• Defective punch

clutch• Defective punch hole

motor

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the connectors of sensor,

clutch and/or motor are properlyconnected.

3. Replace the punch H.P. sensor.4. Replace the punch clutch.5. Replace the punch hole motor.

SC 730 Finisherstapler motorerror

The stapler home position isnot detected within a specifiedtime after the staple motorturns on.

• Loose connection• Defective stapler H.P.

sensor• Defective stapler

motor


and motor are properly connected.3. Replace the stapler H.P. sensor.4. Replace the stapler motor.


4-25



SC 731 Finisher exitguide platemotor error

The exit guide plate opensensor is not activated within aspecified time after the exitguide plate motor turns on.

• Loose connection• Defective exit guide

plate open sensor• Defective exit guide

plate motor


and motor are properly connected.3. Replace the exit guide plate open

sensor.4. Replace the exit guide plate motor.

SC 732 Finisher tray 1shift motorerror

Tray 1 home position is notdetected within a specifiedtime after the tray 1 shift motorturns on.

• Loose connection• Defective tray shift 1

sensor• Defective tray 1 shift

motor


and motor are properly connected.3. Replace the tray shift 1 sensor.4. Replace the tray 1 shift motor.

SC 733 Finisher tray 2lift motor error

• The lower stack height 1sensor is activatedconsecutively (detectingpaper) for 15 seconds afterthe shift tray starts movingup.

• The lower stack heightsensor 1 is deactivatedconsecutively (not detectingpaper) for 15 seconds afterthe shift tray starts movingdown.

• Loose connection• Defective lower stack

height 1 sensor• Defective tray 2 lift

motor• Motor overload


and motor are properly connected.3. Replace the lower stack height 1

sensor.4. Replace the tray 2 lift motor.

SC 734 Finisher tray 2shift motorerror

Tray 2 home position is notdetected within a specifiedtime after the tray 2 shift motorturns on.

• Loose connection• Defective tray shift 2

sensor• Defective tray 2 shift

motor


and motor are properly connected.3. Replace the tray shift 2 sensor.4. Replace the tray 2 shift motor.

SC 818 Watch-dogerror

While the system program isrunning, other processes donot operate at all.

• Defective controller• Software error

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the controller.3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC

table

CTL


4-26



SC 819 Fatal error[696E] Process error System completely down[766D] Memory error Unexpected system memory

size

• Defective RAM DIMM• Defective ROM DIMM• Defective controller• Software error

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check and/or replace the RAM DIMM.3. Check and/or replace the ROM

DIMM.4. Replace the controller.5. See NOTE at the end of the SC

table.

CTL

SC820 Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code[0001]to[06FF]

CPU error • System firmwareproblem

• Defective controller

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Reinstall the controller system

firmware.3. Replace the controller.

When the problem cannot be fixed withthe above procedure, the followinginformation displayed on the screenneeds to be fed back to a technicalsupport center.

• SC code• Detailed error code• Program address

CTL

[0702][0709][070A]

CPU/MemoryError

During the self-diagnostic, thecontroller CPU detects anerror. There are 47 types oferror code (0001 to 4005)depending on the cause of theerror. The CPU detects anerror and displays the specificerror code with the programaddress where the erroroccurs).

• System firmwareproblem

• Defective RAM-DIMM• Defective controller


software.3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.4. Replace the controller.

CTL

[0801]to[4005]

CPU error Same as [0001] CTL


4-27



SC 821[0D05]

Self-diagnosiserror: ASIC

The CPU checks if the ASICtimer works properly comparedwith the CPU timer. If the ASICtimer does not function in thespecified range, this SC codeis displayed.

• System firmwareproblem

• Defective RAM-DIMM• Defective controller


firmware.3. Replace the RAM-DIMM.4. Replace the controller board.

CTL

SC822 Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive) [XXXX]: Detailed error code[3003] Timeout error[3004] Command

error

When the main switch isturned on or starting the self-diagnostic, the HDD staysbusy for the specified time ormore.

• Loose connection• Defective HDD• Defective controller

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check that the HDD is properly

connected to the controller.3. Replace the HDD.4. Replace the controller.

CTL

SC 823 Self-diagnostic error: NIB [XXXX]: Detailed error code[6101] MAC address

check sumerror

The result of the MAC addresscheck sum does not match thecheck sum stored in ROM.

[6104] PHY IC error The PHY IC on the controllercannot be properly recognized.

[6105] PHY IC loop-back error

An error occurred during theloop-back test for the PHY ICon the controller.

• Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the controller.

CTL

SC 824[1401]

Self-diagnosiserror:StandardNVRAM

The controller cannotrecognize the standardNVRAM installed or detectsthat the NVRAM is defective.

• Loose connection• Defective standard

NVRAM• Defective controller

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly

inserted into the socket.3. Replace the NVRAM.4. Replace the controller.

CTL


4-28



SC 827 Self-diagnostic error: Standard SRAM DIMM [XXXX]: Detailed error code[0201] Verification

errorError detected during awrite/verify check for thestandard RAM (SRAM DIMM).

• Loose connection• Defective SRAM

DIMM• Defective controller

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the SRAM DIMM.3. Replace the controller.

CTL

SC 828 Self-diagnostic error : ROM [XXXX]: Detailed error code[0101] Check sum

error 1The boot monitor and OSprogram stored in the ROMDIMM is checked. If the checksum of the program isincorrect, this SC code isdisplayed.

[0104] Check sumerror 2

All areas of the ROM DIMMare checked. If the check sumof all programs stored in theROM DIMM is incorrect, thisSC code is displayed.

[0105] ROM error The ROM DIMM is not of therecognized type.

• Defective ROM DIMM• Defective controller

1. Turn the main switch on and off.2. Replace the ROM DIMM3. Replace the controller.

CTL

SC829 Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM [XXXX]: Detailed error code[0302] Composition

error (Slot 0)The result of checking thecomposition data of the RAMin Slot 0 (CN5) on thecontroller is incorrect.

[0401] Verificationerror (Slot 1)

The data stored in the RAM inSlot 1 does not match the datawhen reading.

[0402] Compositionerror (Slot 1)

The result of checking thecomposition data of the RAMin Slot 1 (CN6) on thecontroller is incorrect.

• Not specified RAMDIMM installed

• Defective RAM DIMM

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the RAM DIMM.3. Replace the controller board.

CTL


4-29



SC 833[0F21]

Self-diagnosticerror: I/F error

The controller detects that theBCU is not properlyconnected.




CTL

SC 835 Self-diagnosis error: Centronics interface [XXXX]: Detailed error code[1102] Verification

errorThe controller detects that theloop-back connector is notproperly connected.

[110C] DMAverificationerror

A DMA data abnormality isdetected even when the loop-back connector is properly set.

[1120] Loop-backconnectorerror

The loop-back connector is notset when starting the detailedself-diagnostics.

• Loose connection• Defective loop-back

connector• Defective Centronics

connector• Defective controller


Centronics connector and loop-backconnector.

3. Reconnect the loop-back connector.4. Replace the controller.

CTL

SC 836[1601]

Self-diagnosiserror: FontROM(standard)

The data in the font ROM(standard ROM-DIMM) isdamaged. .

• Defective standardROM-DIMM

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the standard ROM-DIMM.

CTL

SC 837[1602]

Self-diagnosiserror: FontROM (option)

The data in the font ROM(optional ROM-DIMM) isdamaged.

• Defective optionalROM-DIMM

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the optional ROM-DIMM.

CTL

SC 850 Networkinterface error

The network is unusable. • Defective controller 1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the controller.

CTL

SC 851 IEEE1394interface error

The 1394 interface isunusable.

• Defective IEEE1394• Defective controller.

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the IEEE1394 interface

board.3. Replace the controller.

CTL

SC 860 HDD:Initializationerror

The controller detects that thehard disk fails.

• HDD not initialized• Defective HDD

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Reformat the HDD.3. Replace the HDD.

CTL


4-30



SC 861 HDD: Rebooterror

The HDD does not becomeready within 30 seconds afterthe power is supplied to theHDD.

• Loose connection• Defective cables• Defective HDD• Defective controller


HDD and controller.3. Check and replace the cables.4. Replace the HDD.5. Replace the controller.

CTL

SC 863 HDD: Readerror

The data stored in the HDDcannot be read correctly.

• Defective HDD• Defective controller

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the HDD.3. Replace the controller.

CTL

SC 864 HDD: CRCerror

While reading data from theHDD or storing data in theHDD, data transmission fails.

• Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the HDD.

CTL

SC 865 HDD: Accesserror

An error is detected whileoperating the HDD.

• Defective HDD 1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Replace the HDD.

CTL

SC 900 Electriccounter error

Abnormal data is stored in thecounters.

• Defective NVRAM• Defective controller


NVRAM and controller.3. Replace the NVRAM.4. Replace the controller.

CTL

SC 990 Softwareperformanceerror

The software makes anunexpected operation.

• Defective software• Defective controller• Software error

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Reinstall the controller and/or engine

main firmware.3. See NOTE 1 at the end of the SC

table.

CTL

SC 998 Applicationstart error

No applications start within 60seconds after the power isturned on.

• Loose connection ofRAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM

• Defective controller• Software problem

1. Turn the main switch off and on.2. Check if the RAM-DIMM and ROM-

DIMM are properly connected.3. Reinstall the controller system

firmware.4. Replace the controller.

CTL


4-31

NOTE 1: If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the problem may be caused by a softwareerror. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist.• Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken• Summary sheet (SP mode ‘1 Service’, [Print Summary])• SMC All (SP5-990-002)• Logging (SP5-990-004)• Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs• All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logged.)• Image file which causes the problem, if possible

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 23 February, 2001

4-32

4.4 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.4.1 SENSORS

Component CN Condition SymptomOpen SC261

LD H.P. sensor 220-B12Shorted SC260Open SC370/371/372/373

TD sensor

K:208-A3Y:208-B10M:207-A19C:208-A9

ShortedSC370/371/372/373 orSC374/375/376/377

OpenTransfer belt setsensor

208-B2Shorted

SC471

OpenTransfer belt H.P.sensor

212-2Shorted

SC471

OpenID sensor

Rear:213-11Front:213-14 Shorted

SC385

OpenThe Paper End indicator lights even ifpaper is placed in the paper tray.

Paper end sensor

Tray1:202-A5Tray2:202-B7By-pass:207-A15

ShortedThe Paper End indicator does not lighteven if there is no paper in the papertray.

OpenThe bottom plate of the paper feedunit is not lifted up.Paper lift sensor

Tray1:202-A2Tray2:202-B4

Shorted SC501/502

OpenPaper Jam is detected whenever aprint is made.

Relay sensor 202-A8Shorted

Paper Jam is detected even if there isno paper.

OpenPaper Jam is detected whenever aprint is made.Vertical transport

sensor202-B10

ShortedPaper Jam is detected even if there isno paper.

OpenPaper Jam is detected whenever aprint is made.Registration

sensor207-B2

ShortedPaper Jam is detected even if there isno paper.


Fusing exit sensor 210-A11Shorted



Paper exit sensor 210-B2Shorted


OpenThe paper overflow message is notdisplayed even when a paper overflowcondition exists, causing paper jam.Exit upper limit

sensor210-A6

ShortedThe paper overflow message isdisplayed.

The CN numbers are the connector numbers on the BCU.

23 February, 2001 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

4-33

Tro

ub

le-

sh

oo

tin

g

4.5 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

RatingFuse

115 V 220 - 240 VSymptom when turning on the main

switch

Power Supply UnitFU1 15A/125V - - -CB1 - - - 8A/250V

No response (No power is supplied tothe electrical components.)

FU2 10A/125V 5 A/250VNo response (No DC power is suppliedto the electrical components.)

FU81 3.15 A/250 V 3.15A/250V

Only 12V DC power is not supplied.SC260 or SC261 may occur.(This fuse is directly soldered on thePSU.)

4.6 LEDS (BCU)

StatusLED

Blinking Stays OFF or ONLED1 (RED) The Main CPU functions

correctly.The Main CPU does not functionproperly.

LED (Green)The MUSIC CPU functionscorrectly.

The MUSIC CPU does not functionproperly.

23 February, 2001 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

5-1

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

5. SERVICE TABLES

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

!CAUTIONBefore accessing the service menu, do the following:

Confirm that there is no print data in the printer buffer (the Data In LEDmust not be lit or blinking).If there is some data in the buffer, wait until all data has been printed.

5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

Entering the Service Mode

There are two ways to enter the service mode.

Method 1: Turn the machine on while pressing the “On Line” key and “Escape” keytogether until the above message in the illustration appears on the display.

NOTE: If you switch the machine off, any jobs stored on the hard disk using thesample print and protected print features will be deleted.Check first with the user tools to see if there are any jobs stored with thesefeatures(Menu key - Sample Print, or Protected Print).

Method 2: Press the “Up/Down arrow” keys together for about 5 seconds, thenpress the “Enter” key.The above message shown in the illustration appears on the display.

NOTE: The machine automatically goes off line when you enter the service mode.

16Œ… ~‚Q s ‚k‚b‚c

Online Menu

Jon Reset Form Feed

Escape

Enter (#)

Power Error Data In

SYSTEM Ver Ver.1.Service

G058D520.WMF

SERVICE PROGRAM MODE 23 February, 2001

5-2

Accessing the Required Program

Use the “Up/Down arrow” keys to scroll through the menu listing.

1. Service Menu: Controller service modes2. Engine Mainte: Engine service modes3: End: Exit service mode

To select an item, press the “Enter” key. Then the sub-menu will appear.Scroll through the sub menu items using the “Up/Down arrow” keys.To go back to a higher level, press the “Escape” key.

Inputting a Value or Setting for a Service Program

Enter the required program mode as explained above. The setting appearing onthe display is the current setting.Select the required setting using the “Up/Down arrow” keys, then press the “Enter”key. The previous value remains if the “Enter” key is not pressed.

Exiting Service Mode

Select “3. End” from the service mode main menu, then press the “Enter” key.

NOTE: To make the following settings effective, you must turn the main switch offand on after exiting service mode.

SP Modes Related to the Engine SP Modes Related to the ControllerSP2-208-009SP2-213-001SP2-224-001 to 004SP5-930-001 to 005SP5-994-001 and 002SP7-905-007 and 009

SP5-009-001SP5-961-001

NOTE: If the settings of SP modes 5-993-013 to 015 are changed, these changeswill affect the next line position adjustment.

23 February, 2001 PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE

5-3

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

5.2 PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE

5.2.1 REMARKS

Display on the Control Panel Screen

Since the maximum number of characters which can be displayed on the controlpanel screen is limited (14 characters), the description of SP modes displayed onthe screen needs to be abbreviated. The following are the major abbreviationsused for the SP modes for which the full description is over 14 characters.

Paper TypeN: Normal paperTH: Thick paper

Color Mode [Color][K]: Black in B&W mode[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan[FC]: Full Color mode[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full color mode

Paper Feed StationP: Paper trayB: By-pass table

Fusing SectionH: Heating rollerP: Pressure roller

Print ModeS: SimplexD: Duplex

Process Speed62.5, 125, 185

PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE 23 February, 2001

5-4

As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the printmode (B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SP modesettings depend on the process speed.

ModeResolution

(dpi)Line speed

(mm/s)Print speed

(ppm)600 x 600

1,200 x 600185 38

B/W1,200 x 1,200 125 28

600 x 6001,200 x 600

125 28Color

1,200 x 1,200 62.5 14

OHP/Thick600 x 600

1,200 x 6001,200 x 1,200

62.5 10

Others

The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.

FA: Factory setting

(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factorysetting sheets enclosed, which is located underneath the jammed paper removaldecal.)

DFU: Design / Factory Use only

Do not touch the SP mode in the field.

“P” in the right hand side of the mode number column means that this SP moderelates to the Printer Controller. If “P” is not in the column, this SP mode relates tothe Printer Engine.

A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the mainswitch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.

An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that thismode is stored in the EEPROM (Engine) or NVRAM (Printer Controller). If you do aRAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the default value.

The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SPtable in the following manner.

[ Adjustable range / Default setting / Step ] Alphanumeric

NOTE: If “Alphanumeric” is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, thesetting of the SP mode is displayed on the screen using alphanumericcharacters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket inthe SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.

23 February, 2001 PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE

5-5

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

5.2.2 SERVICE MODE MENU (“1. SERVICE”)

Mode No.(Class 1 and 2)

Function / [ Setting ]

[Bit Switch]1 Bit Switch 12 Bit Switch 23 Bit Switch 34 Bit Switch 4

*P Adjusts bit switch settings. DFUNOTE: Currently the bit switches are not being used.

All data has to be set to “0”.

[Clear Setting]1 Clear Setting P Initializes settings in the “System” menu of the user

mode.[Print Summary]1 Print Summary P Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all

the controller settings).[Disp. Version]1 Disp. Version P Displays the version of the controller firmware.

[Data Recall]1 Factory2 Previous3 Current

*P Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be eithera) the factory setting, b) the previous setting, or c) thecurrent setting.

[Mode Selection]1 *1200x1200Photo2 600 x 600 Text3 1200 x 600 Text4 600x600 Photo5 1200x600Photo

P Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printergamma adjustment. When selecting a print mode, anasterisk (*) is displayed in the front of the mode.

[Test Page]1 Gradation2 Color Pattern

Prints the test page to check the color balance beforeand after the gamma adjustment.

[Gamma Adj.]1 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 1 Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in

the “Mode Selection” menu.[ 0 to 255 / 16 / 1/step ]

2 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 2 [ 0 to 255 / 32 / 1/step ]3 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 3 [ 0 to 255 / 48 / 1/step ]4 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 4 [ 0 to 255 / 64 / 1/step ]5 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 5 [ 0 to 255 / 80 / 1/step ]6 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 6 [ 0 to 255 / 96 / 1/step ]7 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 7 [ 0 to 255 / 112 / 1/step ]8 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 8 [ 0 to 255 / 128 / 1/step ]9 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 9 [ 0 to 255 / 144 / 1/step ]10 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 10 [ 0 to 255 / 160 / 1/step ]11 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 11 [ 0 to 255 / 176 / 1/step ]12 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 12 [ 0 to 255 / 192 / 1/step ]13 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 13 [ 0 to 255 / 208 / 1/step ]14 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 14 [ 0 to 255 / 224 / 1/step ]15 Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow 15

*P

[ 0 to 255 / 240 / 1/step ][Data Save]1 Data Save P Stores the print gamma adjusted with the “Gamma

Adj.” menu item as the current setting. Before themachine stores the new ‘current setting’, it moves thedata currently stored as the ‘current setting’ to the‘previous setting’ memory storage location.

PRINTER CONTROLLER SERVICE MODE 23 February, 2001

5-6

Mode No.(Class 1 and 2)


[Toner Limit]1 Photo Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image

development.[ 100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step ]

2 Text

*P

[ 100 to 400 / 190 / 1 %/step ]

5.2.3 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING

NOTE: Currently, the bit switches are not being used.

1. Enter the SP mode, select “Service Menu”, then press[Enter] twice.

2. Select #1, #2, #3, or #4 for the desired bit switch, thenpress [Enter].• [!] ["]: Move to the next switch.

3. Adjust the bit switch using the following keys.• [!] ["]: Move to the next bit.• [Escape]: Exit without saving changes.• [Enter]: Exit and save changes.NOTE: The left digit on the display is bit 7 and the right digit is bit 0.

4. Press [Enter] to save changes and exit.

<Service>Bit Switch >>

Bit SwitchBit switch 1

Sw#1 00000000bit0 _


RTB 10 (General) One of these is now being used for 'Series Print Mode' (reduces the time between jobs)

23 February, 2001 PRINTER ENGINE SERVICE MODE

5-7

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

5.3 PRINTER ENGINE SERVICE MODE

5.3.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE (“2. ENGINE”)

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1 Mode No.(Class 1, 2, and 3) Function / [ Setting ]

[Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration(Paper Type, [Color ], Process Speed), Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP, TH: Thick1 N [K] 62.5 *2 N [K] 125 *3 N [K] 185 *4 N [FC] 62.5 *5 N [FC] 125 *6 TH [K] *7 TH [FC] *8 OHP [K] *

001

9 OHP [FC] *

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changingthe registration clutch operation timing for eachmode.[ -50 to 50 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

[S-to-S Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration1 By-pass Table *2 Paper Tray 1 *3 Paper Tray 2 *

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changingthe laser main scan start position for each mode.[ -50 to 50 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ] FA

4 Paper Tray 3 *5 Paper Tray 4 *

002

6 Duplex *

[ -50 to 50 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step ]

[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle(Paper Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed), Paper Type: N: Normal, TH: Thick1 P 62.5 *2 P 125 *3 P 185 *4 B N 62.5 *5 B N 125 *6 B N 185 *7 B TH *

003

8 B OHP *

Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at theregistration roller by changing the paper feedtiming.[ -10 to 10 / 0.0 / 1 mm/step ]

[Dev. Mt Speed1] Development Drive Motor Speed 1([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick1 [K] 62.5 N *2 [K] 125 *3 [K] 185 *4 [YMC] 62.5 *5 [YMC] 125 *6 [YMC] 185 *

004

7 [K] 62.5 TH *

Adjusts the development drive motor speed.[ 96.0 to 104.0 / 100.0 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU

[Dev. Mt Speed2] Development Drive Motor Speed 2([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> TH: Thick1 [K] 125 * Adjusts the development drive motor speed.

[ -2 to 10 / 2 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU2 [YMC] 125 * [ -10 to 10 / 0 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU

005

3 [YMC] 62.5 TH * [ -3 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 %/step ] DFU104 [Fusing Cont.] Fusing Control

1 Control Method * Selects the fusing control method.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: ON/OFF Control1: Phase Control

PRINTER ENGINE SERVICE MODE 23 February, 2001

5-8


104 25 Process Speed * Selects the power-on default target fusingoperation temperature.The target operating fusing temperature dependson the process speed. When the machine isswitched on, it starts warming up for the processspeed specified in this SP mode.

[0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: Color 62.5 mm/s (temperature specified by SP1-105-8 and 19)1: Color 125 mm/s (temperature specified by SP1-105-9 and 20)2: Thick / OHP (temperature specified by SP 1-105-13 and 24)3: K 125 mm/s (temperature specified by SP 1-105-4 and 15)4: K 185 mm/s (temperature specified by SP 1-105-5 and 16)

105 [Fusing Temp.] Fusing Temperature(Heating or Pressure roller: Paper Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex, Process Speed)Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP. TH: Thick1 H: Ready * Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing

ready condition.After the main switch has been turned on, themachine enters the print ready condition when theheating roller temperature reaches thetemperature specified in this SP mode.When the machine is in the recovery mode fromthe energy saver or auto off mode, the machinebecomes ready when both heating and pressureroller temperatures reach the specifiedtemperature.Ready temperature = (Target temperaturespecified in SP1-104-25 or 105-3 to 24) –Temperature specified in this SP mode.[ 0 to 100 / 10 / 1oC/step ]

2 P: Ready * Sets the pressure roller temperature for theprinting ready condition.Ready temperature = (Target temperaturespecified in SP1-104-25 or 105-3 to 24) –Temperature specified in this SP mode[ 0 to 100 / 20 / 1oC/step ]

The following SPs set the target operating temperatures of the heating and pressurerollers in various modes.3 H:N [K] S 62.5 * [ 100 to 200 / 140 / 5°C/step]4 H:N [K] S 125 * [ 100 to 200 / 165 / 5°C/step]5 H:N [K] S 185 * [ 100 to 200 / 175 / 5°C/step]6 H:N [K] D 125 * [ 100 to 200 / 155 / 5°C/step]7 H:N [K] D 185 * [ 100 to 200 / 165 / 5°C/step]8 H:N[FC] S 62.5 * [ 100 to 200 / 140 / 5°C/step]9 H:N[FC] S 125 * [ 100 to 200 / 170 / 5°C/step]10 H:N[FC] D 62.5 * [ 100 to 200 / 135 / 5°C/step]11 H:N[FC] D 125 * [ 100 to 200 / 160 / 5°C/step]12 H:OHP [K] * [ 100 to 200 / 170 / 5°C/step]13 H:OHP [FC] * [ 100 to 200 / 170 / 5°C/step]


Should be '105-3 to 28'.


Should be '105-3 to 28'.


5-9

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


105 14 P:N [K] S 62.5 * [ 0 to 200 / 120 / 5°C/step]15 P:N [K] S 125 * [ 0 to 200 / 145 / 5°C/step]16 P:N [K] S 185 * [ 0 to 200 / 155 / 5°C/step]17 P:N [K] D 125 * [ 0 to 200 / 135 / 5°C/step]18 P:N [K] D 185 * [ 0 to 200 / 145 / 5°C/step]19 P:N[FC] S 62.5 * [ 0 to 200 / 120 / 5°C/step]20 P:N[FC] S 125 * [ 0 to 200 / 150 / 5°C/step]21 P:N[FC] D 62.5 * [ 0 to 200 / 115 / 5°C/step]22 P:N[FC] D 125 * [ 0 to 200 / 140 / 5°C/step]23 P:OHP [K] * [ 0 to 200 / 150 / 5°C/step]24 P:OHP [FC] * [ 0 to 200 / 150 / 5°C/step]25 H:TH [K] * [ 0 to 200 / 175 / 5°C/step]26 H:TH [FC] * [ 0 to 200 / 175 / 5°C/step]27 P:TH [K] * [ 0 to 200 / 155 / 5°C/step]28 P:TH [FC] * [ 0 to 200 / 155 / 5°C/step]

106 [Temp. Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)1 H Roller2 P Roller

Displays the current temperature of the heatingand pressure rollers.

902 [Paper Size] Tray Paper Size1 Tray 1 A4/LT * Specifies the paper size for tray 1.

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: A4 sideways, 1: LT sidewaysTray 1 can only use these two sizes.US: 1 FA

2 Tray 2 B4/LG * Specifies the paper size for tray 2.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: B4 lengthwise, 1: LG lengthwiseThis specifies which size is detected for a sensoroutput of 1101 (see section 6 for details).US: 1 FA

3 Tray 2 A4/LT * Specifies the paper size for tray 2.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: A4 lengthwise, 1: LT lengthwiseThis specifies which size is detected for a sensoroutput of 0110 (see section 6 for details).US: 1 FA

4 Tray 2 B5/LT * Specifies the paper size for tray 2.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: LT, 1: B5 lengthwiseThis specifies which size is detected for a sensoroutput of 1011 (see section 6 for details).

[Idling Time] (Fusing Idling Time)9101 Idling Time * Specifies the timer for deciding whether to do

fusing idling when receiving a print command.

When receiving a new job within the time specifiedin this SP mode after the last job is completed,fusing idling is not done because the fusingsection was already warmed up during the lastjob.

[ 0 to 180 / 1 / 1 minute/step ] DFU


5-10


[Temp. Cor. 1] Fusing Temperature Correction (Correction Timing)9131 Sheet Setting * Specifies the number of sheets to determine

whether or not to apply the fusing temperaturecorrection.

During a multi print job, the fusing temperaturetends to slightly overshoot around the 10th sheetand then stabilize. Temperature overshooting maycause the glossiness to increase.To minimize the overshooting, both fusing andpressure roller temperatures are decreased by theamount specified in SP1-914 at the number ofsheets specified in this SP mode, until the end ofthe job.[ 1 to 60 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]

[Temp. Cor. 2] Fusing Temperature Correction (Temperature Setting)1 Heating *

914

2 Pressure *Specifies the temperature to be subtracted fromthe targeted temperatures specified in SP1-105-3to-24.[ 0 to 30 / 10 / 5°C /step ]

[Stand-by Time]1 Job Receiving * Specifies the time to shift the machine into the

stand-by mode when not receiving a print startcommand after receiving a print preparationcommand.[ 0 to 180 / 60 / 10 seconds/step ]0: The machine does not shift to the stand-bymode.

915

2 Job End * Specifies the time to shift the machine into thestand-by mode after the last job is completed.[ 0 to 180 / 60 / 10 seconds/step ]0: The machine does not shift to the stand-bymode.

996 [OHP/TH Fusing] OHP/Thick Paper Fusing Temperature Correction(Heating or Pressure Roller)Specifies the temperature for starting a print job.The fusing section is already warmed up when the last print job was completed. If printsare made on OHP or thick paper at this time, the fusing temperature tends to be higherthan the target, causing exit roller marks or a paper jam in the fusing section.To prevent this, the print job will not start if the heating and pressure roller temperaturesare higher than the following:(Target temperature specified by SP1-105-12, -13, -23, -24) - (Temperature specified bythis SP mode (default: 5°C for heating roller, 10°C for pressure roller))4 H:Print Temp * [ 1 to 30 / 5 / 1°C /step ]5 P:Print Temp * [ 1 to 30 / 10 / 1°C /step ]


5-11

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

SP2-XXX (Drum)


001 [Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (DC or AC component: [Color], Process Speed)U: Upper, L: Lower

1 DC:[K] 62.5 *2 DC:[K] 125 *3 DC:[K] 185 *4 DC:[Y] 62.5 *5 DC:[Y] 125 *6 DC:[M] 62.5 *7 DC:[M] 125 *8 DC:[C] 62.5 *9 DC:[C] 125 *

Adjusts the DC component of the charge rollerbias in the various print modes.Charge bias (DC component) is automaticallyadjusted during process control; therefore,adjusting these settings does not effect whileprocess control mode (SP3-125 Default: ON) isactivated. When deactivating process controlmode with SP3-125, the values in these SPmodes are used for printing.[ 300 to 1000 / 750 / 10 volts/step ] DFU

10 AC U Limit [K] * Sets the upper limit of the AC componentadjustable range for black.During machine initialization and process controlself-check, the AC component of the charge rollerbias is automatically adjusted within the rangespecified by SP2-001-010 and 011.[0 to 255 / 103 / 1/step ] DFU

11 AC L Limit [K] * Sets the lower limit of the AC componentadjustable range for black.[0 to 255 / 97 / 1/step ] DFU

12 AC:[K] 62.5 • Displays the AC component of the charge rollerbias adjusted during machine initialization orprocess control self-check.

• Sets AC bias in the various print modes for testpurposes.

If the optimum AC bias cannot be selectedbecause of the upper and lower limits (SP2-001-10 and 11 for K, SP 2-001-21 and 22 for YMC),this may cause white spots on images and blackspots on background. (In particular, spots mayappear if the room temperature is very low.)Check the printouts after changing the AC biaswith these SP modes (SP2-001-12 to 20) andexiting SP mode. If increasing or decreasing theAC bias for relevant color solves the spot problem,shift the AC upper and lower limits (SP2-001-10and 11 for K, SP 2-001-21 and 22 for YMC) by thevalue increased or decreased during the test.

NOTE: The AC upper and lower limits have beenoptimized by the manufacturer; therefore,these settings should not be adjusted inthe field.

[0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU13 AC:[K] 125 [0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU14 AC:[K] 185 [0 to 255 / 148 / 1/step ] DFU15 AC:[Y] 62.5 [0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU16 AC:[Y] 125 [0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU17 AC:[M] 62.5 [0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU18 AC:[M] 125 [0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU19 AC:[C] 62.5 [0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU


5-12


001 20 AC:[C] 125 [0 to 255 / 71 / 1/step ] DFU21 AC U Limit[FC] * Sets the upper limit of the AC component

adjustable range for color.During machine initialization and process controlself-check, the AC component of the charge rollerbias is automatically adjusted within the rangespecified in the SP2-001-021 and 022.[0 to 255 / 90 / 1/step ] DFU

22 AC L Limit[FC] * Sets the lower limit of the AC componentadjustable range for color.[0 to 255 / 84 / 1/step ] DFU

103 [LD Control] LD Power Control([Color Mode, Color], Process Speed, K or Color mode) P: Power, M: MagnificationAdjusts the laser power by changing the current applied to LD.Laser power is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjusting thesedata has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default : ON) is activated.After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes are usedfor printing.

1 P0:[FC,K] 62.5 * [ 0 to 1023 / 754 / 1/step ] DFU2 P0:[FC,K] 125 * [ 0 to 1023 / 718 / 1/step ] DFU4 P0:[FC,Y] 62.5 * [ 0 to 1023 / 754 / 1/step ] DFU5 P0:[FC,Y] 125 * [ 0 to 1023 / 718 / 1/step ] DFU7 P0:[FC,M] 62.5 * [ 0 to 1023 / 754 / 1/step ] DFU8 P0:[FC,M] 125 * [ 0 to 1023 / 718 / 1/step ] DFU10 P0:[FC,C] 62.5 * [ 0 to 1023 / 754 / 1/step ] DFU11 P0:[FC,C] 125 * [ 0 to 1023 / 718 / 1/step ] DFU13 P0:[K,K] 62.5 * [ 0 to 1023 / 754 / 1/step ] DFU14 P0:[K,K] 125 * [ 0 to 1023 / 754 / 1/step ] DFU15 P0:[K,K] 185 * [ 0 to 1023 / 675 / 1/step ] DFU25 P1:[K,K] 62.5 * [ 0 to 1023 / 754 / 1/step ] DFU26 P1:[K,K] 125 * [ 0 to 1023 / 754 / 1/step ] DFU27 P1:[K,K] 185 * [ 0 to 1023 / 675 / 1/step ] DFU

Main Scan Magnification ([Color], Laser Exposure Frequency)55 M:[K] 64.3MHz *56 M:[Y] 64.3MHz *57 M:[M] 64.3MHz *58 M:[C] 64.3MHz *59 M:[K] 47.6MHz *

Displays the result of the latest line positionadjustment. Changing this affects the main scanmagnification; however, this will be automaticallycorrected at the next line position adjustment. If afine adjustment is required, it can be done withSP5-993-013 to 015 (this affects the way that theadjustment is done, and will be effective from thenext line position adjustment).[ 0 to 280 / 140 / 1 dot/step ] 1 dot = 20µ DFUNOTE: If the line position adjustment does not

work properly, the line position can beadjusted manually with this SP mode as atemporary measure. In this case, the lineposition adjustment needs to be disabledwith SP5-993-001.

109 [LD Beam Pitch] LD Beam PitchSets the beam pitch for black in 1200 dpi or 600 dpi mode.NOTE: After replacing the laser optics housing unit, the data printed on the decal attached

to the new unit must be input with this SP mode.2 Pitch 1200 * [ 0 to 255 / 50 / 50 pulse/step ] FA3 Pitch 600 * [ 0 to 255 / 42 / 50 pulse/step ] FA5 Display 1200 [ 0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step ]


5-13

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


109 6 Display 600 [ 0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step ]

112 [Polygon OFF 1] Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing1 Warming-up * The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine

receives no print start command for the timespecified in this SP mode after receiving the printpreparation command.[ 0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step ]0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode

2 Job End * The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machinereceives no print job for the time specified in thisSP mode after the previous job was completed.[ 0 to 60 / 1 / 1 second/step ]0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode

113 [Polygon OFF 2] Polygon Mirror Motor OFF1 Polygon OFF 2 The polygon mirror motor does not turn on until

the printer enters the ready condition even afterreceiving the print start command.[ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step ]0: Enable, 1: DisableNOTE: When a user complains about high

frequency noise, enabling this mode canminimize the noise.

201 [Dev. Bias] Development Bias ([Color], Process Speed)1 [K] 62.5 *2 [K] 125 *3 [K] 185 *4 [Y] 62.5 *5 [Y] 125 *6 [M] 62.5 *7 [M] 125 *8 [C] 62.5 *9 [C] 125 *

Adjusts the development bias.Development bias is automatically adjusted duringprocess control; therefore, adjusting these settingshas no effect while Process Control (SP3-125Default: ON) is activated.After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125,the values in these SP modes are used forprinting.[ 200 to 800 / 500 / 10 V/step ] DFU

207 [Forced Toner] Forced Toner Supply ([Color])1 [K] *2 [Y] *3 [M] *4 [C] *

Forces toner to be supplied to the developmentunit for the number of times specified by this SPmode.1 time: The toner supply clutch turns on for 0.7 s

and off for 1.3 s.[ 0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step ]

208 [Toner Mode] Toner Supply Method ([Color])1 [K] *2 [Y] *3 [M] *4 [C] *

Selects the toner supply method.[ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: Fixed supply (with the supply rates stored with

SP2-208-5 to 8)1: Fuzzy control supply2: Proportional control supply (using the Vref

values stored with SP2-224-5 to 8)5 Fixed Rate [K] *6 Fixed Rate [Y] *7 Fixed Rate [M] *8 Fixed Rate [C] *

Sets the toner supply rate used when the tonersupply method (SP2-208-1 to 4) is set to ‘0’ (fixedsupply mode).[ 0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step ]


5-14


208 9 Upper Limit *#

Specifies the maximum possible toner supply,expressed as a percentage of the maximumamount of toner that can possibly be supplied fora sheet of paper.If too much toner is supplied to the developmentunit especially for black or in the low humiditycondition, this may cause dirty background due toinsufficient agitation. This SP mode limits themaximum possible toner supply for black and onlyin the low humidity condition for color.[ 20 to 70 / 42 / 1 %/step ] DFUNOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on

to effect the setting change.210 [Toner Counter] Toner Supply Counter ([Color])

5 [K] *6 [Y] *7 [M] *8 [C] *

Displays the total time that the toner supply clutchhas been on.This data is stored in the memory chip on eachtoner cartridge.[ 0 to 5000 / - / 1 second/step ]

212 [Toner Near/End] Toner Near End / End Detection Threshold ([Color])1 Start [K] *2 Start [YMC] *

When the amount of toner amount left in thecartridge becomes less than this value, themachine starts monitoring the Vt values for tonernear end detection.[ 0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 g/step ]

5 Near [K] *6 Near [YMC] *

Specifies the threshold for toner near-enddetection.The machine detects toner near-end when thefollowing happens 10 times consecutively.

Vt > Vref + Threshold[ 0 to 50 / 4 / 0.1 V/step ]

7 End [K] *8 End [YMC] *

Specifies the threshold for toner end detection.The machine detects toner end when the followinghappens 10 times consecutively. Then, themachine stops printing, even during a print job.

Vt > Vref + Threshold[ 0 to 50 / 8 / 0.1 V/step ]

9 Pixel [K] *10 Pixel [YMC] *

Specifies the number of sheets with full imagecoverage that can be printed after toner near-endhas been detected.When near-end is detected, the pixels in theimages are counted. The machine detects tonerend when the following happens, and the machinestops printing even during a print job.

Pixel count = 5 A4/LT sheets with fullimage

coverage[ 0 to 255 / 5 / 1 sheet/step ]NOTE: The setting of SP2-212-11 has priority for

deciding when to stop printing.


5-15

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


212 11 Min. Print * Specifies the minimum number of sheets that canbe printed after toner near-end has been detected.However, when the following happens 10consecutive times, the machine stops printingeven during a print job or if this guaranteedminimum has not been met.

Vt > Current Vref value + 1.2V or Vt > 4.8V

[ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 sheet/step ]

213 [T End ON/OFF] Toner End Detection ON/OFF1 T END ON/OFF *

#Enables or disables toner near-end and enddetection (if disabled, the toner supply clutch ontime is still counted).[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric, DFU0: Disabled, 1 EnabledNOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on

to effect the setting change.223 [TD Vcnt] TD Sensor Vcnt Control

1 Initialization * Enables or disables the Vcnt Auto Adjustmentwhen detecting a new development unit.When the machine detects a new developmentunit, developer initialization automatically starts.During the developer initialization, Vcnt isautomatically adjusted so that Vt is within 3.0 ±0.1V.[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric, DFU0: Disabled1: Enabled

2 Humidity * Enables or disables the Humidity Auto Correction.This corrects the Vcnt value for the currenthumidity. This correction is applied to both theVcnt values automatically adjusted duringdeveloper initialization and manually adjusted withSP2-224-1 to 4.If this correction does not work well under certainenvironmental conditions or due to a defectivehumidity sensor, deactivate the Humidity AutoCorrection and adjust the Vcnt value in SP2-224-1to 4 (by trial and error).[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Enabled

3 Toner Fill Up * Activates or deactivates the Toner Fill Up mode,which fills up the toner supply tube with tonerduring developer initialization.This function is required only at machineinstallation. Although the default is “0”, the factorysetting is “1”. After toner fill-up occurs duringmachine installation, the setting is changed to “0”automatically.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric, DFU0: Deactivate1: Activate


5-16


224 [Vcnt / Vref] Vcnt / Vref ([Color])Adjusts the Vcnt value manually.The value in this SP mode is effective until after the next process control self-check. Toalways use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode with SP2-208-1 to 4.

1 Vcnt [K]2 Vcnt [Y]3 Vcnt [M]4 Vcnt [C]

*#

[ 0 to 220 / 100 / 0.1 V/step ]NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on

to effect the setting change.

Adjusts the Vref value manually.The value in this SP mode is effective until the next process control self-check. To alwaysuse this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode with SP2-208-1 to4.

5 Vref [K] *6 Vref [Y] *7 Vref [M] *8 Vref [C] *

[ 0 to 50 / 28 / 0.1 V/step ]

301 [Transfer Cur.] Transfer Current([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, SP: Special PaperAdjusts the transfer current for each color and each print mode.NOTE: If the transfer current is increased too much, image offset may occur especially in

halftone areas.1 [K]P S 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]2 [K]P S 185 * [ 5 to 50 / 18 / 1 µA/step ]3 [K]P D 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 12 / 1 µA/step ]4 [K]P D 185 * [ 5 to 50 / 18 / 1 µA/step ]5 [K]B S 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]6 [K]B S 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 12 / 1 µA/step ]7 [K]B S 185 * [ 5 to 50 / 18 / 1 µA/step ]8 [FC,K]P S 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]9 [FC,K]P S 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 12 / 1 µA/step ]10 [FC,Y]P S 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]11 [FC,Y]P S 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 11 / 1 µA/step ]12 [FC,M]P S 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]13 [FC,M]P S 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]14 [FC,C]P S 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]15 [FC,C]P S 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 11 / 1 µA/step ]16 [FC,K]P D 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]17 [FC,K]P D 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 12 / 1 µA/step ]18 [FC,Y]P D 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]19 [FC,Y]P D 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 11 / 1 µA/step ]20 [FC,M]P D 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 4 / 1 µA/step ]21 [FC,M]P D 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 9 / 1 µA/step ]22 [FC,C]P D 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]23 [FC,C]P D 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]24 [FC,K]B S 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]25 [FC,K]B S 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 12 / 1 µA/step ]26 [FC,Y]B S 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]27 [FC,Y]B S 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 11 / 1 µA/step ]28 [FC,M]B S 62.5 * [ 5 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]29 [FC,M]B S 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]


5-17

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


301 30 [FC,C]B S 625 * [ 5 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]31 [FC,C]B S 125 * [ 5 to 50 / 11 / 1 µA/step ]32 [K]OHP 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]33 [FC,K]OHP 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]34 [FC,Y]OHP 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 12 / 1 µA/step ]35 [FC,M]OHP 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]36 [FC,C]OHP 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 12 / 1 µA/step ]37 [K]TH 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 6 / 1 µA/step ]38 [FC,K]TH 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]39 [FC,Y]TH 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]40 [FC,M]TH 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]41 [FC,C]TH 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]42 [K]SP 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]43 [K]SP 125 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]44 [K]SP 185 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]45 [FC,K]SP 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]46 [FC,Y]SP 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]47 [FC,M]SP 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]48 [FC,C]SP 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]49 [FC,K]SP 125 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]50 [FC,Y]SP 125 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]51 [FC,M]SP 125 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]52 [FC,C]SP 125 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]53 [FC,K]SP 185 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]54 [FC,Y]SP 185 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]55 [FC,M]SP 185 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]56 [FC,C]SP 185 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]

309 [Cur.Paper Size] Transfer Current - Paper Size Correction (Paper Tray or By-pass)Corrects the transfer current for paper size.When small paper is used for printing, the transfer current flows to the drum at the nonimage areas where the transfer belt touches the OPC drum. This may cause an abnormalimage due to insufficient current at the image areas.To increase the current by 1.5 times, set the SP mode to “15”.NOTE: Increase only when an abnormal image (insufficient image transfer) occurs on a

small paper size. However, increasing the current too much may cause imageoffset.

1 P LT SEF * [ 10 to 40 / 12 / 0.1/step ]2 P Post Card * [ 10 to 40 / 40 / 0.1/step ]3 B LT SEF * [ 10 to 40 / 12 / 0.1/step ]4 B Post Card * [ 10 to 40 / 40 / 0.1/step ]

801 [PA Roller Cur.] Paper Attraction Roller Current([Color], Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed): Current Adjustment(Paper or By-pass): Paper Size Correction


2-309 Use Post Card for paper widths less than or equal to 100 mm. Use LTSEF for paper widths greater than 100 mm but not greater than 216 mm.


5-18


801 Adjusts the paper attraction roller current for black-and-white mode.If paper misfeeds occur at the transfer unit in black-and-white mode, check and/or adjustthe paper attraction roller current.NOTE: The black development section is a long way from the paper attraction roller. If the

current for black-and-white mode is reduced too much, the transfer belt may notattract the paper properly, causing a paper jam.If the current is increased too much (paper attraction roller current > transfercurrent), image offset may occur in halftone areas or other image problems mayoccur (e.g. toner scattering on the image), especially if humidity is low.

When adjusting the current with this SP mode, the value should be lower than the transfercurrent.

1 [K] S 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]2 [K] S 125 * [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]3 [K] S 185 * [ 0 to 50 / 15 / 1 µA/step ]

Adjusts the paper attraction roller current for color printing.If paper misfeeds occur at the transfer unit in color mode, check and/or adjust the paperattraction roller current.

NOTE: The magenta development section is close to the paper attraction roller.Decreasing the current may not cause paper misfeed.

If the current is increased too much, the following image problems may occur dependingon the humidity.High humidity:Insufficient image transfer in magenta due to current flow to the magenta OPC drumLow humidity:Offset image in magenta halftone areas due to paper charged positive too muchWhen adjusting the current with this SP mode, the value should be lower than transfercurrent.

6 [FC] S 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]7 [FC] S 125 * [ 0 to 50 / 10 / 1 µA/step ]8 [FC] D 62.5 * [ 0 to 50 / 2 / 1 µA/step ]9 [FC] D 125 * [ 0 to 50 / 5 / 1 µA/step ]

Adjusts the correction, depending on the paper size.When small paper is used for printing, the paper attraction roller current flows to the non-image areas of OPC drum where the transfer belt touches the drum. This may cause anabnormal image due to insufficient current.To increase the current by 1.5 times, set the SP mode to “15”.NOTE: Adjust only when an abnormal image (insufficient image transfer) occurs on a

small paper size. Increasing the current too much may cause image offset inmagenta halftone areas.

10 P LT SEF * [ 10 to 30 / 15 / 0.1/step ]11 P Post Card * [ 10 to 30 / 20 / 0.1/step ]12 B LT SEF * [ 10 to 30 / 15 / 0.1/step ]13 B Post Card * [ 10 to 30 / 20 / 0.1/step ]

908 [Mirror Motor] Mirror Positioning Motor ([Color])Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the mirrorposition, which corrects the optically skewed image; however, this will be automaticallycorrected at the next line position adjustment.NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be

adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case, theline position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.

2 [C] *3 [M] *4 [Y] *

[ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 pulse/step ] DFU


2-801 Use Post Card for paper widths less than or equal to 100 mm. Use LTSEF for paper widths greater than 100 mm but not greater than 216 mm.


5-19

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


909 [Main-scan Reg.] Main-scan Registration ([Color])Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the mainscan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line positionadjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-010 to 012 (thisaffects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the next line positionadjustment.NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be

adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case, theline position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.1 dot = 20µ

1 [Y] *2 [M] *3 [C] *4 [K] *

[ -255 to 255 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] DFU

916 [Sub-scan Reg.] Sub-scan Registration ([Color Mode, Color], Resolution)Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the subscan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line positionadjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-016 to 021 (thisaffects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the next line positionadjustment.NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be

adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case, theline position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.600 dpi: 1 dot = 40µ, 1200dpi: 1 dot = 20µ

1 [K] 1200 * [ 0 to 20000 / 7510 / 1 dot ] DFU2 [FC,K] 1200 * [ 0 to 20000 / 15038 / 1 dot ] DFU3 [FC,Y] 1200 * [ 0 to 20000 / 10402 / 1 dot ] DFU4 [FC,M] 1200 * [ 0 to 20000 / 1136 / 1 dot ] DFU5 [FC,C] 1200 * [ 0 to 20000 / 5762 / 1 dot ] DFU6 [K] 600 * [ 0 to 20000 / 3755 / 1 dot ] DFU7 [FC,K] 600 * [ 0 to 20000 / 7519 / 1 dot ] DFU8 [FC,Y] 600 * [ 0 to 20000 / 5201 / 1 dot ] DFU9 [FC,M] 600 * [ 0 to 20000 / 568 / 1 dot ] DFU10 [FC,C] 600 * [ 0 to 20000 / 2881 / 1 dot ] DFU

919 [MScan Lgth Det] Main-scan Length Detection1 MScan Lgth Det Enables or disables the main-scan length

detection.[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Disable1: Enable

994 [MScan Reg Cor] Main-scan Registration Correction ([Color])Specifies the correction to the main-scan length.Main-scan length differs for each machine due to variations in parts used in the laseroptics housing unit. Fine adjustment of main-scan length is done at the factory on eachunit.This SP mode is DFU except for when replacing the laser optics housing unit. Whenreplacing the unit, the data printed on the label attached to the new unit must be input withthis SP mode.NOTE: When fine adjustment is required, the adjustment should be done with SP5-993-

010 to 012.1 dot = 20µ

1 [Y] [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA DFU2 [M] [ -128 to 127 / 1 / 1 dot/step ] FA DFU3 [C] [ -128 to 127 / 1 / 1 dot/step ] FA DFU4 [K] [ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA DFU


5-20


[Motor Reset] Mirror Positioning Motor Reset9951 Motor Reset Rotates the mirror position motors (CMY) by 250

pulses clockwise; then by 125 pulsescounterclockwise. This moves the mirrors back tothe initial position. Then, the settings of SP2-908-002 to 004 are reset to 0.When the line position adjustment fails, it is one ofpossible causes when the mirror position motorlocks. Performing this SP mode can move themirrors back to the original position if it locks.Then, do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002).


5-21

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

SP3-XXX (Process)


005 [TD Initial] TD Sensor Initialization ([Color])1 [K]2 [Y]3 [M]4 [C]5 [All Color]

Initializes the developer. DFU

Press the Enter key to execute the initializationafter the machine asks “Execute?”.

6 Result Displays the developer initialization result.[ 1 or 2 / - / - ]1: Success2: FailureAll colors are displayed. Values is displayed in theorder K Y C M.e.g., 1 1 2 1: Initialization of Cyan failed but theothers succeeded

See the troubleshooting section for details.006 [Vcnt Initial] Vcnt Initial Setting Display ([Color])

1 [K]2 [Y]3 [M]4 [C]

Displays the initial Vcnt value.[ 0 to 240 / 100 / 0.1/step ]

007 [Vcnt Current] Vcnt Current Value Display ([Color])1 [K]2 [Y]3 [M]4 [C]

Displays the current Vcnt value.[ 0 to 240 / - / 0.1/step ]

008 [Humidity]1 Humidity Displays the humidity measured by the

humidity/temperature sensor.[ 0 to 100 / - / 1/step ]

107 [Vsg Display] Vsg Display (Front or Rear)1 Vsg F * Displays the Vsg value of the front ID sensor.

[ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]

Vsg is normally 4.0 ± 0.5 V.If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this isdetected 3 times consecutively, it leads to SC385.

2 LED Current F * Displays the ID sensor LED current adjustedduring Vsg adjustment.[ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]

3 Vsg R * Displays the Vsg value of the rear ID sensor.[ 0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step ]

Vsg is normally 4.0 ± 0.5 V.If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this isdetected 3 times consecutively, it leads to SC385.

4 LED Current R * Displays the ID sensor LED current adjustedduring Vsg adjustment.[ 0 to 1023 / - / 1 ]


5-22


120 [Dev. g Target] Development Gamma Target ([Color])Adjusts the development gamma by changing the Vref value used for toner densitycontrol.Vref is automatically corrected so that the gamma measured during the process controlself-check becomes “the value set with this SP mode ± 0.25”1 [K] * [ 100 to 300 / 155 / 1 mg/cm2/KV / step ] DFU2 [Y] *3 [M] *4 [C] *

[ 100 to 300 / 125 / 1 mg/cm2/KV / step ] DFU

121 [Dev. g Display] Development Gamma Display ([Color])Displays the development gamma measured during the process control self-check.1 [K]2 [Y]3 [M]4 [C]

[ 0 to 10000 / - / 1 mg/cm2/KV /step ]Normal Range: 1.00 to 2.00

122 [Vk Display] Vk Display ([Color])1 [K]2 [Y]3 [M]4 [C]

Displays the current Vk value.[ -255 to 255 / - / 1/step ]Normal Range: -50 to 50

123 [Vref Display] Current Vref Display ([Color])1 [K]2 [Y]3 [M]4 [C]

Displays the current Vref value.[ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]

125 [Process Contr.] Process Control1 ON/OFF * Enables or disables process control.

[ 0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: OFF (Use the fixed values for VD, VL and VBset with SP2-001, SP2-103, and SP2-201.)1: ON

2 LD Control * Selects the LD control mode.[ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: Fixed (at the value in SP2-103)1: Controlled by process control2: Controlled by LD power selection

3 Auto TD Adj. * Specifies when to perform the Auto Toner DensityAdjustment. When performing the Auto TonerDensity Adjustment, the machine supplies orconsumes toner so that the development gammais within ± 0.25 of the gamma target.[ 0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: Disable1: Initial process control self-check2: Job end process control self-check3: Initial & Job end process control self-checkDo not adjust unless advised by senior technicalstaff.

126 [Forced SelfChk] Forced Self-check1 Forced SelfChk Performs a forced process control self-check.2 Forced TD Adj. Performs a forced auto toner density adjustment.

Do not use unless advised by senior technicalstaff.


5-23

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


902 [Pntr. Display] Pointer Table Display ([Color])1 [K] *2 [Y] *3 [M] *

4 [C] *

Displays the number in the pointer table that wasselected during the latest process control self-check.[ 1 to 30 / - / 1/step ]

903 [M/A Target] M/A Target ([Color])Adjusts the M/A (Mass per Area, mg/cm2) value used during the process control self-check.Adjusting this changes the development bias. This causes the solid ID to increase ordecrease. If developer capability causes an ID problem, toner density needs to beadjusted with SP3-120-1 to 4, depending on the color.

903 1 [K] *2 [Y] *3 [M] *4 [C] *

[ 0 to 150 / 50 / 1 mg/cm2 /step ] DFU

904 [M/A for LD] M/A Target for LD Correction ([Color])Adjusts the M/A value used during the LD correction mode. This value is effective whenSP3-125-2 “LD Control Selection” is set to “2”.Adjusting this data effects the image reproduction especially in highlight areas.1 [K] *2 [Y] *3 [M] *4 [C] *

[ 0 to 100 / 12 / 1 mg/cm2 /step] DFU

906 [PC SelfChk] Process Control Self-checks1 Job End * Specifies the execution timing of the job end

process control self-check.[ 0 to 999 / 200 / 1 print/step ]The job end process control self-check isautomatically done after a job is completed when200 prints have been made since the last self-check.The counter for the job end process control self-check resets when one of the following processcontrol self-checks is done.• Initial• Interval: Interrupt• Non-use Time• During Toner EndWhen K prints are made, the number of prints iscalculated with the K coefficient in SP3-906-5.

2 Interrupt * Specifies the execution timing of the interruptprocess control self-check.[ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step ]The interrupt process control self-check isautomatically done if the number of prints in thejob exceeds the number set in this SP mode.When the print job is completed, the counter isreset, even if the interrupt self check did not occur.When K prints are made, the number of prints iscalculated with the K coefficient in SP3-906-5.


5-24


906 3 Non-use Time 1 * Specifies the executing timing of the non-use timeprocess control self-check.[ 0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step ]0: DisableThe non-use time process control self-check isautomatically done after the number of prints setwith this SP mode have been made and no printshave been made for the time set with SP mode 3-906-4 since the last print job.If the conditions are met, the self-check will bedone after the print job is completed.The counter is reset when the one of the followingprocess control self-checks is done.• Initial• Interval: Job End• Interval: Interrupt

4 Non-use Time 2 * Specifies the executing timing of the non-use timeprocess control self-check.[ 0 to 255 / 30 / 1 minutes/step ]0: Disable

5 K Coefficient * Sets the coefficient to calculate the counter valuefor black-and-white prints.[ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1/step ] DFU

With the default setting (100), counters used forprocess control count up by 1 when 1 black-and-white print has been made.

910 [Vmin Display] Vmin Display ([Color])1 [K] * Displays the current Vmin value for K2 [Color] * Displays the lowest current Vmin value for the

colors (CMY).911 [Vt Display Cur] Vt Current Display ([Color])

1 [K] *2 [Y] *3 [M] *4 [C] *

Displays the current Vt value.[ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]

912 [Vt Display Ave] Vt Average Display ([Color])1 [K] *2 [Y] *3 [M] *4 [C] *

Displays the average Vt value.[ 0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step ]

913 [T. Supply Time] Toner Supply Time Display ([Color])1 [K] *2 [Y] *3 [M] *4 [C] *

Displays the total toner supply clutch on time.[ 0 to 5000 / - / 10 ms/step ]


3-913 This is the time that the clutch was on for the most recent page - compare with 2-210, which is the total clutch on time.


5-25

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


920 [OPC Refresh]1 Temperature * This SP determines the temperature threshold for

determining whether refresh mode is done justafter the machine is switched on.The charge roller generates NOx (nitrogenoxides), and these contaminate the OPC drumsurface and may cause a smeared image.Just after the main switch is turned on, if thetemperature measured by both the thermistorlocated at the right side on the laser opticshousing unit and the temperature/humidity sensoris greater than the temperature specified in thisSP mode, refresh mode is done before initialprocess control.During refresh mode, toner is developed on theOPC with 50V development potential and cleanedto remove NOx. This cycle is repeated a fewtimes.[ 10 to 30 / 25 / 1°C /step ]

2 Humidity * This SP determines the humidity threshold fordetermining whether refresh mode is done justafter the machine is switched on.Just after the main switch is turned on, if thehumidity measured by the temperature/humiditysensor is greater than the humidity specified inthis SP mode, refresh mode is done before theinitial process control self-check.[ 10 to 90 / 75 / 1%/step ]

3 Prints * Specifies how often refresh mode is done.When the total number of prints since the lastrefresh mode exceeds the number specified in thisSP mode, refresh mode is done before the jobend process control self-check.[ 100 to 25500 / 200 / 100 prints/step ]

4 Mode Set * Enables/disables refresh mode.[ 0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Done at power on and toner end recovery2: Done at power on, toner end recovery, and

after the specified number of prints.NOTE: Refresh mode is done during the toner

end recovery self-check after a new tonercartridge is installed.

5 Forced Executes a forced refresh mode.Use this mode when the image is smeared. Ittakes about 1 minute.Also use after replacing the components of thetransfer unit (see section 3).


5-26


921 [Toner Refresh]Perform forced toner refresh mode.If dirty background appears on the front side of outputs with low image coverage, this maybe caused by old toner remaining in the development unit attached to the carrier. Becauseof this, new toner supplied into the development unit does not get attracted to the carrierand will flow out and cause dirty background. When the above dirty background appears,check whether or not the development gamma is within the target (SP3-120 and 121). Ifthe development gamma is within the target, do this SP mode.The machine automatically does the toner refresh mode in the following sequence.1. Consumes toner in the development unit without toner supply until toner end is

detected2. Starts toner recovery mode.3. Starts process control self-check.1 [K]2 All Color

975 [P Ctrl Result] Process Control Self-check Result1 P Ctrl Result Displays the result of the latest process control

self-check.[ 0 to 9999 / - / 1/step ]

All colors are displayed. The results are displayedin the order “K Y C M”e.g., 1 1 9 1: The self-check for Cyan failed butthe others were successful

See the troubleshooting section for details.


5-27

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

SP5-XXX (Mode)


[Language]0091 Language *

#P

Selects the language for the control panel.[ 0 to 16 / 2 / 1/step ]

NOTE: When changing language, the main switchhas to be turned off and on to initialize thesystem.

[Counter Method]0451 Counter Method *

PSelects the counting method if the meter chargemode is enabled with SP5-930-001.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Developments1: Prints

NOTE: The counting method can be changed onlyonce, regardless of whether the countervalue is negative or positive.

101 [Energy Saver]3 Energy Saver 1 *

PAfter the end of a job, the machine enters EnergySaver mode (level 1) when this timer runs out.[ 0 to 60 / 0 / 10 sec/step ]

4 Energy Saver 2(Auto OFF mode)

*P

After the end of a job, the machine enters EnergySaver mode (level 2) when this timer runs out.[ 0 to 3600 / 3600 / 60 sec/step ]

[Double Count]1041 Double Count *

PSpecifies whether the counter is double clicked forA3/DLT size prints.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Normal count1: Double count

305 [ES Level 2 Set]1 ES Level 2 Set *

PEnables or disables Energy Saver Level 2 (AutoOff mode).[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Enabled1: Disabled

Data Language Data language0 No language 9 Norwegian1 Japanese 10 Danish2 English 11 Swedish3 American 12 Polish4 French 13 Portuguese5 German 14 Hungarian6 Italian 15 Czech7 Spanish 16 Finnish8 Dutch


5-28


801 [Memory Clear]1 All P Resets all the controller and engine settings to

their defaults and the counters to 0.To clear the memory, enter this SP mode, pressthe Enter key, then turn the main switch off andon.NOTE: All settings are reset to the defaults. SMC

sheets should be printed out before doinga memory clear.

See NOTE 1 at the end of the SP table for a list ofsettings cleared.

2 ENG All Clears all the engine settings.3 SCS P Clears the system settings.4 IMH P5 MCS P

Not used.

8 PRT P Clears the user mode system settings.11 NCS P Clears the network settings.15 ENG Setting Clears the engine settings except for counters.16 ENG Counter Clears all counters.

803 [Input Check] See section 5-3-2.804 [Output Check] See section 5-3-3.

[Destination] Destination Code Display8081 Destination * Displays the destination code.

[SC ON/OFF] SC Detection ON/OFF8091 SC ON/OFF * Enable or disables the service call detection (SC

codes will be ignored if disabling this SP mode).[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Enable1: Disable

[SC Reset]8101 SC Reset * Resets a type A service call condition.

NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on afterresetting the SC code.

[SN Display] Serial Number Display8112 SN Display * Displays the machine serial number.

[FAX TEL No.]8122 FAX TEL No. *

PSets the fax or telephone number for a servicerepresentative. This number is printed on theCounter List, which can be printed with the user’s“Counter” menu if the Meter Charge mode isselected with SP5-930-1.This can be up to 13 characters (both numbersand alphabetic characters can be input).

[HDD Init.] HDD Initialization8321 HDD Init. P Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only in

there is a hard disk error.


5-29

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


833 [JobLog ON/OFF]7 JobLog ON/OFF *

PSaves the result of the jobs in the job log. If thismode is enabled, the result is written on the HDD.If no HDD is installed, this feature is disabled evenif this SP is set to ‘enabled’.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ]0: Disabled1: Enabled

[Plug/Play] Plug & Play Name Selection9071 Plug/Play *

PSpecifies the manufacturer and model name.[ 0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step ] FA

930 [Meter Charge] Meter Charge Mode1 ON/OFF # Enables or disables the Meter Charge mode.

When enabling the Meter Charge mode, the“Counter” menu is added to the user menu.

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: OFF1: ON

MF Model Name NetBeui0 Ricoh Aficio AP3800C AficioAP3800

1 Ricoh ColorLaser AP828 ColorAP8282 Savin SLP38c SLP38c3 Gestetner DSc38 DSc384 NRG DSc38 DSc385 Infotec IC 280 IC2806 Lanier 2138 AG 2138AG7 Lanier 2138 AH 2138AH


5-30


930 3 Menu # Selects the method for displaying the alert whenthe life of the parts in a maintenance kit hasalmost ended.[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Click 21: Click 1The following table shows the machine conditionwhen the near end or end condition of eachmaintenance unit is detected.In this table, ‘-‘ means ‘normal operation’

4 Paper Feed # Determines whether to display the alert when thelife of the paper feed rollers is nearly ended.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: No Alert1: Alert

5 Paper Trans. # Determines whether to display the alert when thelife of the transfer unit is nearly ended.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: No Alert1: Alert

6 Factory Use DFU

Setting: 1 (Click 1) Setting: 0 (Click 2)Near End Printing Near End Printing

A - Alert - - - -B - Alert - - - -C Alert Alert Stop Alert Alert StopD - Alert - - - -E Alert Alert Stop Alert Alert StopF - Alert - - - -G Alert Alert Stop Alert Alert StopH - Note - - - -

A: Color PCUB: Color Development UnitC: Fusing UnitD: Black Development UnitE: Waste Toner BottleF: Black PCUG: Oil Supply UnitH: Paper Feed Rollers

NOTE: SP5-930-004 allows the alert for the paper feedroller to be displayed.


5-31

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


961 [Finisher Stack] Finisher Maximum Stack1 Finisher Stack *

#P

Enables or disables maximum stack mode for thelower shift tray only in staple mode.If this is enabled, the upper tray can be used forstacking 500 sheets but it stays at the upper exit(will not be used for stapling mode), and the lowertray is used for stacking up to 2,000 sheets.If this is disabled, the upper tray can be used forstacking 500 sheets and the lower tray for 1,500sheets.[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]0: Disabled1: EnabledNOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on

to effect the setting change.989 [Loop Back Test]

1 Duplex3 Finisher4 PFU

Executes a communication test with peripheralsby using a special tool (connector) which is uniquefor each peripheral.The machine checks if the communication with theperipherals is OK or NG; then displays the result.DFU

990 [SMC Print]2 All P4 Logging P6 Non-Default P7 NIB Summary P

Prints out the SMC sheets.

991 [Jam OFF/ON]Jam ON/OFF1 Jam ON/OFF Enables or disables jam detection.

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Enable1: Disable

993 [Line Adj.]Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: MagnificationFor example: M Reg = Main scan registration1 Mode Selection * Specifies when the automatic line position

adjustment is done.[ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: Never done1: Done at a) all process control self checksexcept after toner end recovery and developerinitialization, b) new PCU detected, and c) thetemperature has changed by 5°C since the lastadjustment2: As for setting ‘1’, except it is not done duringself-checks. However, it is done at the initialprocess control self check.The size of the 5°C difference can be changedwith SP5-993-3

2 Execute * Use to make a line position adjustment.


5-32


993 3 Temperature * Specifies the temperature for starting the linepositioning adjustment.[ 3 to 15 / 5 / 1/oC]The line position adjustment automatically startswhen the temperature differs by the amountspecified in this SP mode from the temperaturewhen the last adjustment was done.There are two thermistors on the laser optics-housing unit. The thermistor close to the fusingunit monitors the temperature for this adjustment.

4 Intrpt ON/OFF * Enables or disables the line position adjustmentduring a print job when the temperature differs bythe amount specified in SP5-993-003 from thetemperature at the last adjustment.[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Enabled

5 Stand-by * Enables or disables the line position adjustmentduring stand-by mode when the temperaturediffers by the amount specified in SP5-993-003from the temperature at the last adjustment.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Enabled

6 Job Start Enables or disables the line position adjustmentjust before starting a color print job when thetemperature differs by the amount specified inSP5-993-003 from the temperature when themachine woke up from energy saver mode.[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]0: Disabled1: Enabled

7 Result * Displays the result of the latest line positionadjustment in 4 digits.

First 2 digits: Error detected on the front ID sensorLast 2 digits: Error detected on the rear ID sensorRefer to the Troubleshooting section for moredetails about the two-digit codes.

8 Exe. Counter * Displays how many times the line positionadjustment has been executed.Counts up by +1 normally.After a forced adjustment and a PCUreplacement, it counts up +3Also includes adjustments done at the factory.

9 Error Counter * Displays how many times errors have beendetected during the line position adjustment.

The way that the auto line position adjustment is done can be adjusted using the followingSP modes (SP5-993-010 to 021). These are coefficients used for the adjustment.Normally, do not change except if the automatic adjustment gives poor results immediatelyafter installing a new optics housing unit. Change the value then do a forced line positionadjustment (SP 5-993-2) to check the effects of the changes.Example: If magenta is always shifted one dot to the left, reduce 5-993-11 by 1.10 M Reg. [Y] *11 M Reg. [M] *12 M Reg. [C] *

A fine adjustment to the main-scan registration.[ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA DFU1 dot = 20µ


5-33

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


993 13 M Mag. [Y] *14 M Mag. [M] *15 M Mag. [C] *

A fine adjustment to the main-scan magnification.[ -100 to 100 / 0 / 0.01 %/step ] FA, DFUNOTE: The setting changes in this SP mode will

be affect the next line position adjustment.16 S Reg. 600[Y] *17 S Reg. 600M][ *18 S Reg. 600[C] *19 S Reg. 1200[Y] *20 S Reg. 1200[M] *21 S Reg. 1200[C] *

A fine adjustment to the sub-scan registration foreach color (color registration).[ -128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] DFU600dpi: 1 dot = 40µ1200 dpi: 1 dot = 20µ

22 Interrupt 1 * Specifies the number of sheets to be printedbefore a line position adjustment is done during aprint job.[ 10 to 250 / 100 / 10 sheets/step ]SP 5-993-4 must be set to ‘enabled’.When the temperature difference meets theconditions specified in SP5-993-3, the machinestarts counting the number of prints in the job. Themachine interrupts the print job and does the lineposition adjustment if the number of printsexceeds the number specified in this SP mode.If the counted number of prints does not exceedthe number specified, the machine resets thecounter, then continues to monitor thetemperature and does the line position adjustmentnext time.

23 Interrupt 2 * Performs the line position adjustment when thenumber of prints reaches the number specified inthis SP mode regardless of the temperaturechange.[ 0 to 350 / 0 / 50 prints/step ] DFU0: Disable

24 Mscan Lgth Det * Performs the main scan length detection when thepolygon motor has operated consecutively for thetime specified in this SP mode.[ 100 to 950 / 200 / 50 s/step ]

994 [Unit Set] Maintenance Unit Detection ON/OFF1 Dev/PCU *

#Enables or disables PCU and development unitdetection.[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Enable1: DisableNOTE: If this mode is disabled, new unit detection

also does not function. Use this mode as atemporary measure, only when the micro-switches are defective.

2 Oil Unit *#

This is for the oil supply unit only, and not thefusing unit[ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Enable1: DisableNOTE: Use this mode as a temporary measure,

only when the unit detection mechanism isdefective.


5-34


997 [Test Pattern]1 Tray Selection Selects the tray for making a test print.

[ 0 to 4 / 1 / 1/step ]0: By-pass Table 1: Tray 12: Tray 2 3: Tray 34: Tray 4NOTE: The machine makes a test pattern on the

paper size loaded in the selected papertray.

2 Pattern Selects a test pattern.[ 0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step ]0: None1: 1-dot sub-scan line2: 2-dot sub-scan line3: 1-dot main-scan line4: 2-dot main-scan line5: 1-dot grid pattern (fine)6: 2-dot grid pattern (fine)7. 1-dot grid pattern (rough)8. 2-dot grid pattern (rough)9. 1-dot slant grid pattern10. 2-dot slant grid pattern11. 1-dot pattern12. 2-dot pattern13. 4-dot pattern14. 1-dot trimming pattern15. 2-dot trimming pattern16. Cross stitch: sub-scan17. Cross stitch: main-scan18. Belt pattern19. Belt pattern (vertical)20. Checkered Flag21. Grey scale (vertical)22. Grey scale (Horizontal)23. Solid

3 Single Color Selects the color for making a test pattern.[0 to 6 / 6 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: Red 1: Green2: Blue 3: Yellow4: Magenta 5: Cyan6: Black

4 Color Mode Selects the color mode for making a test print.[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: Full Color 1: Single Color

5 Resolution Selects the resolution for making a test print.[0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: 600x600 1: 1200x6002: 1200x1200

6 By-pass P-size Selects the paper size for making a test patternfrom the by-pass table.[0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric0: A4 LEF 1: LT LEF2: A3 3: DLT


5-35

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s


997 7 Print Prints the test pattern with the settings specifiedwith SP5-997-001 to 006.NOTE: When exiting the SP mode, the test print

mode is automatically canceled.


5-36

SP6-XXX (Peripherals)

6 Mode No.(Class 1, 2, and 3)


110 [Punch] Punch Positioning1 Punch 1 *2 Punch 2 *

Adjusts the punching position.Punch 1US: 2 punch holesEurope: 2 punch holesNorth Europe: 4 punch holes

Punch 2US: 3 punch holesEurope: 4 punch holes

Increment: Holes move toward the paper center.Decrement: Holes move toward the paper edge.

[ -7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]111 [Staple] Staple Position

1 Staple * Adjusts the stapling position.

Increment: Staple position moves toward the edgeof paper.Decrement: Staple position moves toward thecenter of paper.

[ -3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step ]

NOTE: Although the adjustable range is ±3.5 mm,the stapling position can be changed only by 1.0mm when stapling one position at the front or rearside even when the input value is more than 1.0.


5-37

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

SP7-XXX (Data Log)



003 [M/C Counter] Meter Charge Counter(Print, Development)

1 P: Total7 P: B&W8 P: Full Color

Displays the values of the color counters.[ -9999 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ]

10 D: Color11 D: B&W

These SP modes are development counters forthe meter charge mode.

20 P: Full Color21 P: B&W/Single22 P: Single23 P: B&W25 P: Full Color

These SP modes are used for Japanese marketonly.

28 P: Color29 P: B&W30 P: Color Total

*P

These SP modes are print counters for the metercharge mode.

007 [Other Counter]1 Duplex2 A3/DLT/Over4203 Staple

*P

Displays counter values.[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

101 [Size Counter] Paper Size Counter4 A35 A46 A513 B414 B532 11 x 1736 8 1/2 x 1438 8 1/2 x 1144 5 1/2 x 8 1/2128 Others

*P

Displays the counter values for each paper size.[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

204 [Feed Counter] Paper Feed Section Counter1 Tray 12 Tray 23 Tray 3/LCT4 Tray 45 By-pass6 Duplex

*P

Displays the number of sheets fed from eachpaper feed station.[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed

station.

209 [Punch Counter]1 Punch *

PDisplays the number of times hole punching hasbeen done.[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step ]

401 [SC Counter]1 SC Counter *

PDisplays the number of SC codes detected.[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step ]

502 [Total Jam]1 Total Jam *

PDisplays the total number of jams detected.[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]


5-38



504 [Jam Location]D: Duplex, MB: Mail Box, F; Finisher, E: External, I: InternalON: On check, OFF: Off Check

3 Tray 1:ON4 Tray 2:ON5 Tray 3/LCT:ON6 Tray 4:ON

Displays the number of jams according to thelocation where jams were detected.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed

station.8 Regist.:ON9 E Tray:ON10 I Tray:ON11 D:ON12 D Exit 1:ON13 D Exit 2:ON14 D Exit 3:ON15 D: Feed: ON20 MB Upper:ON21 MB Lower:ON51 Tray 1:OFF52 Tray 2:OFF53 Tray 3:OFF54 Tray 4:OFF61 Regist: OFF63 E Tray:OFF64 I Tray:OFF65 D:OFF66 D Exit 1:OFF67 D Exit 2:OFF68 D Exit 3:OFF69 D Feed:OFF100 F Entrance101 F Shift Tray 1102 F Shift Tray 2103 F Staple104 F Exit105 F Drive106 F Tray Up/Down107 F Jogger108 F Staple109 F Exit110 F Punch111 F Jam Clear

506 [Jam Paper Size]4 A35 A413 B414 B532 11 x 1736 8 1/2 x 1438 8 1/2 x 1144 5 1/2 x 8 1/2128 Others

*P

Displays the number of jams according to thepaper size.[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]


5-39

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s



507 [Jam History]1 Latest2 Latest-13 Latest-24 Latest-35 Latest-46 Latest-57 Latest-68 Latest-79 Latest-810 Latest-9

*P

Displays the 10 most recently detected paperjams.

803 [PM Counter](Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color])Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Oil Supply: Oil Supply Unit, Fusing:Fusing Unit, Transfer: Transfer Unit

1 S:PCU [K]2 S:PCU [Y]3 S:PCU [M]4 S:PCU [C]5 S:Dev. [K]6 S:Dev. [Y]7 S:Dev. [M]8 S:Dev. [C]9 S:Oil Supply10 PF By-pass11 PF Tray 112 PF Tray 213 PF Tray 3/LCT14 PF Tray 415 S:Fusing16 S:Transfer

Displays the number of sheets printed for eachcurrent maintenance unit.[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]

PM counters click up based on the number of A4(LT) LEF size sheets printed. Therefore, the A3(DLT) Double Count is activated. The DoubleCount cannot be deactivated.

When a unit is replaced, the machineautomatically detects that the new unit is installed.Then, the current PM counter value isautomatically moved to the PM Counter - Previous(SP7-906-1 to 9) and is reset to “0”.The total number of sheets printed with the lastunit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-1 to 9.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed

station.17 R:PCU [K]18 R:PCU [Y]19 R:PCU [M]20 R:PCU [C]21 R:Dev. [K]22 R:Dev. [Y]23 R:Dev. [M]24 R:Dev. [C]25 R:Oil Supply26 R:Fusing27 R:Transfer

Displays the number of revolutions of motors orclutches for each current maintenance unit.[ 0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step ]When a unit is replaced, the machineautomatically detects that the new unit is installed.Then, the current PM counter value isautomatically moved to the PM Counter - Previous(SP7-906-10 to 20) and is reset to “0”.The total number of revolutions made with the lastunit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-10 to20.


5-40



804 [PM Clear] PM Counter Clear(Unit, [Color])Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Transfer: Transfer Unit

1 PCU [K]2 PCU [Y]3 PCU [M]4 PCU [C]5 Dev. [K]6 Dev. [Y]7 Dev. [M]8 Dev. [C]9 Oil Supply10 PF By-pass11 PF Tray 112 PF Tray 213 PF Tray 3/LCT14 PF Tray 415 Fusing16 Transfer50 All

Clears the PM counter.Press the Enter key after the machine asks“Execute?”.When a unit is replaced, the machineautomatically detects that the new unit is installed.Then, the current PM counter value isautomatically moved to the b PM Counter -Previous (SP7-906-1 to 20) and is reset to “0”.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feedstation.

[SC/Jam Clear] SC/Jam Counter Clear8071 SC/Jam Clear *

PClears the counters related to SC codes andpaper jams.

[Counter Clear]8081 Counter Clear *

PClears all counters.See NOTE 1 after the SP table for a list ofsettings cleared.

816 [Tray Clear] Paper Tray Counter Clear1 Tray 12 Tray 23 Tray 3/LCT4 Tray 46 Duplex

*P

Clears the counters (SP7-204) for the number ofsheets fed from the paper feed stations.

NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feedstation.

[Counter Reset]8251 Counter Reset P Rests the total counter values to “0”.

NOTE: This SP mode can be done only once,while the counter values are less than 0.

[Diag. Result] Diagnostic Result8321 Diag. Result *

PDisplays the result of the diagnostics.

901 [Asset Info]1 File Name2 # of Lines3 Location

P Records the location where a problem is detectedin the program. The data stored in this SP is usedfor problem analysis. DFU


5-41

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s



905 [Alert Display]7 Fusing: Alert Specifies the timing for displaying the near-end

condition.With the default setting, near-end is detected andthe alert lights on the panel 2.5K prints beforedetecting the end condition. The unit life is 9303Krevolutions.

Increment: Delays the alert display timing.Decrement: Hastens the alert display timing.1.0K prints = approximately 93K revolutions

[ 0 to 20000 / 9070 / 1 K revolutions/step ]

9 Oil: Alert Specifies the timing for displaying the near-endcondition.With the default setting, near-end is detected andthe alert lights on the panel 2.5K prints beforedetecting the end condition. The unit life is 1860revolutions.

Increment: Delays the alert display timing.Decrement: Hastens the alert display timing.1.0K prints = 93

[ 0 to 10000 / 1628 / 1 K revolutions/step ]906 [PMCounter-PREV] PM Counter - Previous

(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit1 S:PCU [K]2 S:PCU [Y]3 S:PCU [M]4 S:PCU [C]5 S:Dev. [K]6 S:Dev. [Y]7 S:Dev. [M]8 S:Dev. [C]9 S:Oil Supply10 S:Fusing

Displays the number of sheets printed with theprevious maintenance units.

11 R:PCU [K]12 R:PCU [Y]13 R:PCU [M]14 R:PCU [C]15 R:Dev. [K]16 R:Dev. [Y]17 R:Dev. [M]18 R:Dev. [C]19 R:Oil Supply20 R:Fusing

Displays the number of revolutions for motors orclutches in the previous maintenance units.

907 [Check Sum]1 Engine Main2 Engine MUSIC

Displays the check sum of the firmware.

910 [Firmware PN] Firmware Part Number1 Controller * Displays the part number of the firmware.2 Engine P


5-42



910 5 ADF7 Finisher9 PFU11 Mail Box13 Duplex14 MUSIC18 NIB200 Factory204 Printer209 Test210 MIB

Displays the part number of the firmware.

911 [Firmware Ver.]1 Controller2 Engine5 ADF

*P

Displays the firmware version.

7 Finisher

9 PFU11 Mail Box

13 Duplex14 MUSIC

18 NIB200 Factory

204 Printer

209 Test210 MIB


5-43

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

NOTE 1: Memory Clear (SP5-801 & 7-808)The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information,meter charge setting (SP5-930), and meter charge counters (SP7-003) are notcleared.


SP Modes or User Setting to be cleared

[Memory Clear]1 All P All items cleared by SP5-801-002, 003, 004, 005,

008, 011, 015, and 016.2 ENG All All engine related SP modes except for the

following:• Serial number information• SP5-930

3 SCS P SP5-009, 101, 104, 305, 812, 833, 961, and 970SP7-101, 204, 209, 401, 502, 504, 506, and 507

4 IMH P No SP modes are cleared. But, all files stored inthe HDD are cleared.

5 MCS P No SP modes are cleared.8 PRT P The following service settings:

• Bit switches• Gamma settings (User & Service)• Toner LimitThe following user settings:• Tray Priority• Menu Protect• System Setting except for setting of Energy

Saver• I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)• PCL Menu

11 NCS P All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)15 ENG Setting All engine related SP modes except for the

following:• Serial number information• SP modes related to meter charge• Counters and logging data

801

16 ENG Counter All counters and logging data related to engine

7[Counter Clear]808

1 Counter Clear P SP7-101, 204, 209, 502, 504, 506, and 507


5-44

5.3.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Eachdigit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.

Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1

ReadingSP5-803-XXX

Bit Description0 1

Paper Tray 10 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected1 Paper Lift Sensor

DeactivatedActivated

(Actuator not insidesensor)

2 Paper Height Sensor 13 Paper Height Sensor 2

See Table 1.

1

4 Tray Set Not set SetPaper Tray 20 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected1 Paper Lift Sensor

DeactivatedActivated

(Actuator not insidesensor)

2 Paper Height Sensor 13 Paper Height Sensor 2

See Table 1.1: Activated

(Actuator inside sensor)4 Paper Size Switch 15 Paper Size Switch 26 Paper Size Switch 3

2

7 Paper Size Switch 4

See Table 2.1: Pushed

By-pass Table0 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected1 Paper Size 12 Paper Size 23 Paper Size 3

3

4 Paper Size 4

See Table 3.

Doors0 Front Door Switch Opened Closed1 Left Door Switch Opened Closed2 Right Door Switch Opened Closed3 Vertical Transport Switch Opened Closed4 Duplex Inverter Unit Switch Opened Closed

4

5 Right Door Switch (LCT/PFU) Opened ClosedPaper Feed0 Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected1 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected2 Upper Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected3 Lower Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected4 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected5 Duplex Inverter Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

5

6 Duplex Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected


5-45

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

ReadingSP5-803-XXX

Bit Description0 1

Paper Exit0 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected1 Paper Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected2 Duplex Exit Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected3 Duplex Exit Sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected4 Duplex Exit Sensor 3 Paper not detected Paper detected

6

5 Exit Upper Limit Sensor Not full FullFusing Unit0 Fusing Unit (Set) Not set Set1 Fusing Unit (New) 0 to 1 : New unit installed2 Oil Supply Unit (Set) Set Not set3 Oil Supply Unit (New) 1 to 0 : New unit installed

7

4 European Version US EuropeMotor Lock0 Development Drive Motor - CMY Not locked Locked1 Development Drive Motor - K Not locked Locked2 - - -3 - - -4 - - -5 Fusing Fan Motor Locked (normal

speed)Low speed or not

working6 - - -

8

7 - - -Dev. Unit/ PCU0 Development Unit - K Not set Set1 Development Unit - C Not set Set2 Development Unit - M Not set Set3 Development Unit - Y Not set Set4 PCU - K Not set Set5 PCU - C Not set Set6 PCU - M Not set Set

9

7 PCU - Y Not set SetOthers0 LD H.P. Sensor Not H.P. H.P.1 Transfer Belt Set Sensor Not contact Contact2 Transfer Belt H.P. Sensor Not. H.P. H.P.3 Used Toner Sensor Not full Full4 Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor Not set Set5 - - -

13

6 PSU Thermistor Not high HighMail Box 10 Tray 1 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full1 Tray 1 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected2 Tray 2 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full3 Tray 2 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected4 Tray 3 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full5 Tray 3 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected6 Tray 4 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full

15

7 Tray 4 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected


5-46

ReadingSP5-803-XXX

Bit Description0 1

Mail Box 20 Vertical Transport Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected1 Vertical Transport Sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected

16

2 Door Safety Switch Opened Closed

Table 1: Paper Height SensorLow: Deactivated, High: Activated (actuator inside sensor)

Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2Full Low Low

Nearly full Low HighNear end High High

Almost empty High Low

Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)0: Not pushed, 1: pushed

Models Switch LocationNorth America Europe/Asia 1 2 3 4

11” x 17” SEF 11” x 17” SEF 0 1 0 0A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 0

81/2” x 14” SEF *1 B4 SEF *1 1 1 0 181/2” x 11” SEF *2 A4 SEF *2 0 1 1 011” x 81/2” LEF *3 11” x 81/2” LEF *3 1 0 1 1

A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1

1: PushedNOTES:*1: The machine detects either 81/2” x 14” SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2*2: The machine detects either 81/2” x 11” SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3*3: The machine detects either 11” x 81/2” LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4

Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

Models Bit No.North America Europe/Asia 4 3 2 1

11” x 17” SEF 11” x 17” SEF 0 0 1 1A3 SEF A3 SEF 0 0 0 1

- B4 SEF 0 0 1 081/2” x 11” SEF A4 SEF 0 1 1 0

8” x 13” SEF F SEF 0 1 0 0- A5 SEF 1 1 0 0

51/2” x 181/2” SEF B6 SEF 1 0 0 0Post Card Post Card 0 0 0 0


5-47

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

5.3.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE

CH: ChargePF: Paper FeedTS: Toner SupplyCW: ClockwiseCCW: CounterclockwiseMB: 4-bin MailboxDI: Duplex Inverter

SP5-804-XXX

Description

7 Regist CL Registration Clutch8 By-pass CL By-pass Feed Clutch9 Tray 1 PF CL Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch

10 Pick-up SOL By-pass Pick-Up Solenoid11 Tray 2 PF CL Tray 2 Paper Feed Clutch12 Lift M UP (1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / UP13 Lift M DOWN(1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / DOWN14 Lift M UP(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / UP15 Lift M DOWN(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / DOWN17 PSU Fan M PSU Cooling Fan Motor19 Fusing Fan M H Fusing Fan Motor / High Speed20 Fusing Fan M L Fusing Fan Motor / Low Speed21 Laser Fan H Laser Optics Housing Cooling Fan Motor / High Speed22 Laser Fan L Laser Optics Housing Cooling Fan Motor / Low Speed23 Junction SOL Exit Junction Gate Solenoid24 Oil Supply SOL Oil Supply Unit Solenoid29 K Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - K30 C Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - C31 M Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - M32 Y Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - Y34 Fusing Relay Fusing Relay35 Heat Lamp Heating Roller Fusing Lamp36 Pressure Lamp Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp44 CH DC [Y] 125 Charge DC Bias for Yellow / 125 mm/s45 CH DC [M] 125 Charge DC Bias for Magenta / 125 mm/s46 CH DC [C] 125 Charge DC Bias for Cyan / 125 mm/s47 CH DC [K] 125 Charge DC Bias for Black / 125 mm/s48 CH AC [YMC]125 Charge AC Bias for Color / 125 mm/s49 CH AC [K] 125 Charge AC Bias for Black / 125 mm/s50 DevDC [Y] Development DC Bias for Yellow51 DevDC [M] Development DC Bias for Magenta52 DevDC [C] Development DC Bias for Cyan53 DevDC [K] Development DC Bias for Black54 DevAC [YMC] Development AC Bias for Color55 DevAC [K] Development AC Bias for Black56 Transfer [Y] Transfer Current for Yellow57 Transfer [M] Transfer Current for Magenta58 Transfer [C] Transfer Current for Cyan59 Transfer [K] Transfer Current for Black


5-48

SP5-804-XXX

Description

60 Cleaning Bias Transfer Belt Cleaning Roller Bias51 PA Roller Bias Paper Attraction Roller Bias52 TS CL [Y] Toner Supply Clutch for Yellow63 TS CL [M] Toner Supply Clutch for Magenta64 TS CL [C] Toner Supply Clutch for Cyan65 TS CL [K] Toner Supply Clutch for Black67 Air Supply [Y] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Yellow68 Air Supply [M] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Magenta69 Air Supply [C] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Cyan70 Air Supply [K] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Black71 ID Sensor LED ID Sensor LED72 Drum M L CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Low Speed / Clockwise

23Drum M M CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Middle Speed /

Clockwise74 Drum M H CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / High Speed / Clockwise75 PF M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise76 PF M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise77 PF M H CW Paper Feed Motor / High Speed / Clockwise78 PF M Feed Paper Feed Motor / Feed Speed / Clockwise79 TD Vcnt TD Sensor / Vcnt80 CH AC[YMC]62.5 Charge AC Bias for Color - 62.581 CH AC [K]62.5 Charge AC Bias for Black - 62.582 CH AC [YMC]185 Charge AC Bias for Color - 18583 CH AC [K]185 Charge AC Bias for Black - 18584 Dev AC[YMC]62.5 Development AC Bias for Color - 62.585 Dev AC[K]62.5 Development AC Bias for Black - 62.586 Dev AC[YMC]185 Development AC Bias for Color - 18587 Dev AC[K]185 Development AC Bias for Black - 18591 PA Roller Bias Paper Attraction Roller Bias92 Memory Chip Memory Chip / Power (5V) Supply97 Belt M CW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Clockwise98 Belt M CCW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Counterclockwise99 Belt M Break Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Break120 PF CL PFU(3) Paper Feed Clutch / Paper Feed Unit / Tray 3121 PF CL PFU(4) Paper Feed Clutch / Paper Feed Unit / Tray 4122 Pick-upSOL LCT Pick-up Solenoid / Large Capacity Tray125 PFU M Paper Feed Unit / Motor128 Valve SOL [K] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Black129 Valve SOL [C] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Cyan130 Valve SOL [M] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Magenta131 Valve SOL [Y] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Yellow132 Air Pump M Air Pump Motor135 DevAC TRG[YMC] Development AC Trigger for Color136 DevAC TRG[K] Development AC Trigger for Black137 DevPWM TRG[K] Development PWM Trigger for Black138 DevPWM TRG[C] Development PWM Trigger for Cyan139 DevPWM TRG[M] Development PWM Trigger for Magenta


5-49

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

SP5-804-XXX

Description

140 DevPWM TRG[Y] Development PWM Trigger for Yellow141 CHdcPWM TRG[K] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Black142 CHdcPWM TRG[C] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Cyan143 CHdcPWM TRG[M] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Magenta144 CHdcPWM TRG[Y] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Yellow145 CHac1 TRG[YMC] Charge AC1 Trigger for Color146 Chac2 TRG[YMC] Charge AC2 Trigger for Color147 Chac3 TRG[YMC] Charge AC3 Trigger for Color148 CHac1 TRG[K] Charge AC1 Trigger for Black149 Chac2 TRG[K] Charge AC2 Trigger for Black150 Chac3 TRG[K] Charge AC3 Trigger for Black151 MB M 4-bin Mailbox Main Motor152 MB SOL1 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 1153 MB SOL2 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 2154 MB SOL3 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 3155 MB SOL4 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 4160 Duplex SOL Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid161 DI M1 62.5CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise162 DI M1 65CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 65 / Counterclockwise163 DI M1 125CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 125 / Counterclockwise164 DI M1 130CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 130 / Counterclockwise165 DI M1 185CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 185 / Counterclockwise166 DI M1 193CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 193 / Counterclockwise168 DI M1 370CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Counterclockwise169 DI M1 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Clockwise170 DI M1 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 450 / Clockwise171 DI M2 62.5CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise172 DI M2 65CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 65 / Counterclockwise173 DI M2 125CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 125 / Counterclockwise174 DI M2 130CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 130 / Counterclockwise174 DI M2 185CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 185 / Counterclockwise176 DI M2 193CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 193 / Counterclockwise178 DI M2 370CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 370 / Counterclockwise179 DI M2 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 370 / Clockwise180 DI M2 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 450 / Clockwise181 DI M12 62.5CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 62.5 / Counterclockwise182 DI M12 65CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 65 / Counterclockwise183 DI M12 125CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 125 / Counterclockwise184 DI M12 130CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 130 / Counterclockwise185 DI M12 185CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 180 / Counterclockwise186 DI M12 193CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 193 / Counterclockwise188 DI M12 370CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 370 / Counterclockwise189 DI M12 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 370 / Clockwise190 DI M12 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1&2 / 450 / Clockwise193 Duplex M125CCW Duplex Feed Motor / 125 / Counterclockwise197 Duplex M230CCW Duplex Feed Motor / 230 / Counterclockwise198 Duplex M370CCW Duplex Feed Motor / 370 / Counterclockwise


5-50

SP5-804-XXX

Description

202 DI M2 OFF Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / OFF204 K Dev M H Development Motor - K / High Speed205 K Dev M M Development Motor - K / Middle Speed206 K Dev M L Development Motor - K / Low Speed207 Color Dev M H Development Motor - YMC / High Speed208 Color Dev M M Development Motor - YMC / Middle Speed209 Color Dev M L Development Motor - YMC / Low Speed210 Polygon M 29 Polygon Motor / 29.528211 Polygon M 21 Polygon Motor / 21.850212 LD FC[K]62.5 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 62.5213 LD FC[K]125 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 125214 LD FC[Y]62.5 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 62.5215 LD FC[Y]125 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 125216 LD FC[M]62.5 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 62.5217 LD FC[M]125 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 125218 LD FC[C]62.5 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 62.5219 LD FC[C]125 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 125220 LD1 [K] 62.5 LD1 Power for Black / 62.5221 LD1 [K] 125 LD1 Power for Black / 125222 LD1 [K] 185 LD1 Power for Black / 185223 LD2 [K] 62.5 LD2 Power for Black / 62.5224 LD2 [K] 125 LD2 Power for Black / 125225 LD2 [K] 185 LD2 Power for Black / 185226 LD [K]62.5 LD Power for Black / 62.5227 LD [K]125 LD Power for Black / 125228 LD [K]185 LD Power for Black / 185


5-51

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

5.3.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997)

Test Pattern Printting

Selects the tray in whichdesired paper size isloaded.

SP5-997-001

Selects a patter.SP5-997-002

Selects Single Color orFull Color mode.

Selects a color if printingthe test pattern in theSingle Color mode.

SP5-997-003

SP5-997-004

SP5-997-005Selects the resolution.

Prints the test pattern.

Tray or By-passSelects the desiredpaper size.

SP5-997-007

SP5-997-006

Tray

By-pass

Test Pattern Selection (SP5-997-002)0: None1: 1-dot sub-scan line2: 2-dot sub-scan line3: 1-dot main-scan line4: 2-dot main-scan line5: 1-dot grid pattern (fine)6: 2-dot grid pattern (fine)7. 1-dot grid pattern (rough)8. 2-dot grid pattern (rough)9. 1-dot slant grid pattern10. 2-dot slant grid pattern11. 1-dot pattern12. 2-dot pattern13. 4-dot pattern14. 1-dot trimming pattern15. 2-dot trimming pattern16. Cross stitch: sub-scan17. Cross stitch: main-scan18. Belt pattern19. Belt pattern (vertical)20. Checkered Flag21. Grey scale (vertical)22. Grey scale (Horizontal)23. Solid24. Blank

FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE 23 February, 2001

5-52

5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

5.4.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE

There are four types of firmware as shown below.

Type of firmware FunctionNumber of IC cards

required1. Main Printer engine control 1 card

Printer Engine2. MUSIC Line position adjustment 1 card3. System Printer system firmware 2 cards

Printer Controller4. NIB NIB firmware 1 card

Refer to “5.4.3 Controller/Engine Firmware Upgrade for the procedure.

NOTE: When upgrading all four types of firmware at the same time, you canupgrade them in any order.

However, when upgrading the controller system firmware, use the cards inthe correct order (see below).

Two IC cards are needed to upgrade the controller system firmware. OneIC card is for the operating system (Cardpf.swab), and the other is for theprinter application (Cardprinter.swab). Always upgrade the operatingsystem first, then the printer application next.

5.4.2 ERROR RECOVERY

Engine Firmware/Controller NIB Firmware

If a download attempt failed, try downloading the new firmware again using theprocedure described in section 5.4.3.

Controller System Firmware:

If a download attempt failed, you must boot up the machine from the IC card. To dothis, DIP SW 1 on the controller board needs to be ON. The machine automaticallystarts upgrading the firmware.

23 February, 2001 FIRMWARE UPDATE PROCEDURE

5-53

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

5.4.3 CONTROLLER/ENGINE FIRMWARE UPGRADE

!CAUTION1. Turn off the main switch whenever inserting or removing IC card.2. Do not turn off the machine while downloading the firmware.

G058R713.WMF

Prepare IC Cards

Turn Main SW off

Remove cover [A]

Insert IC card [B], whichcontains "Cardpf.swab"

Turn Main SW on

Displays "Main" or "MUSIC"

Press # key

Displays an asterisk (*)

Select "Update" by Up/Down key

Press # key

Displays 16 asterisks andasterisk disappears one by

one

Displays "Power off on"after completing update

Turn Main SW off

Remove the IC card

Attach the cover

Displays "Network Support"

Displays "Update 1/2 taskdone" , then "Power off on"

Turn Main SW off

Replace IC card withanother one

(Cardprinter.swab)

Turn Main SW on

Displays "Verify Data", then"Updating"

Displays 16 asterisks andasterisk disappears one by

one

Prepare IC Card(s)

Turn Main SW off

Remove cover [A]

Insert IC card [B]

Turn Main SW on

Engine, Controller, NIB

Engine, NIB

Controller

Prepare IC Card

Turn Main SW off

Remove cover [A]

Insert IC card [B]

Turn Main SW on

Engine Firmware Controller System Firmware NIB Firmware

Display "On board SYS 1/2"

Displays "Power off on"after completing update

Turn Main SW off

Remove the IC card

[A]

[B]

CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS 23 February, 2001

5-54

5.5 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

5.5.1 OVERVIEW

There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.

• Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-diagnosticsjust after the power has been turned on.

• Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics byusing a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)

• SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on orduring operation.

The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.

Power ON

Diagnostic RAM Check

CPU Check

ASIC Check

Standard RAMConection Check

Optional RAMConnection Check

Clock Generator Check

Standard NVRAMCheck

Font Header Check

Optional NVRAM Check

Real Time Clock Check

Network Check

Engine I/F Check

Interrupt Check

Memory Chip Check

Power-on orDetailed

ROM Sum Check

Standard RAM DetailedCheck

Optional RAM DetailedCheck

Standard NVRAMDetailed Check

Optional NVRAMDetailed Check

Optinoal HDD Check

IEEE1284 Loop-backCheck

Real Time ClockDetailed Check

Font ROM Sum Check

END

Power-on

Detailed

NG SC821

NG SC820

NG SC838

NG SC826

NG SC828

NG SC829

NG SC826

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

A

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

A

NG Not initialized

NG SC829

NG SC827

NG SC824

NGNot use optional RAM

Error Logged

23 February, 2001 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

5-55

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

5.5.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

This detailed self-diagnostic test requires a loop-back connector (P/N: G0219350).

1. Turn off the machine and attach the loop-back connector to the parallelinterface.

2. Turn on the machine while pressing the “On Line” key and “# Enter” keytogether.

3. The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics and prints the diagnosticreport after completing the test.• Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. The errors detected

during self-diagnostics can be checked with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).• Refer to section 4.2 for details about the error codes.

USER PROGRAM MODE 23 February, 2001

5-56

5.6 USER PROGRAM MODE

Press the “Menu” button and use the “Up/Down arrow” keys to scroll through themenu listing. To go back to a higher level, press the “Escape” key. After changingthe settings, press the “On Line” key. The user menu list can be printed using“Menu List” in the “List/Test Print” user mode.

User Mode Tree

User Mode Counter (Meter charge mode must be ON in SP mode.)

Sample Print (optional HDD required)

Locked Print (optional HDD required)

Paper Input By-pass Size

Tray Paper Size

Paper Type

Tray Locking

Tray PriorityList/Test Print

Maintenance Color Regist.

Image Density

Registration

HDD Format (optinal HDD required)

ROM Update

Menu Protect

System Misfeed Recovery

Prt. Err Report

Auto Continue

Memory Overflow

Sub Paper Size

Paper Size

Duplex

Output Tray

Job Separation

Energy Saver 1

Energy Saver 2

B&W Page Detect

Unit of Measure

Resolution

Host Interface I/O Buffer

I/O Timeout

Network Setup

PCL Menu Orientation

Form Lines

Font Source

Font Number

Font Size

Font Pitch

Symbol Set

Language

USER PROGRAM MODE.WMF

23 February, 2001 DIP SWITCHES

5-57

Ser

vice

Ta

ble

s

5.7 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board

DIP SW No. OFF ON1 Boot-up from flash ROM Boot-up from IC card

2 to 4 Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.

NOTE: If a download attempt failed, you must boot up the machine from the ICcard. To do this, DIP SW 1 on the controller board needs to be ON.

23 February, 2001 OVERVIEW

6-1

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Fusing Unit2. PCU (one for each color)3. Development Unit4. Laser Optics Housing Unit5. Polygon Mirror Motor6. Toner Cartridge7. By-pass Feed Table8. Tray 2

9. Tray 110. Waste Toner Bottle11. Duplex Feed Unit12. Transfer Unit13. Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit14. ID Sensor15. Duplex Inverter Unit

G060D153.WMF

2

6

3 4 51

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

OVERVIEW 23 February, 2001

6-2

6.1.2 PAPER PATH

[A]: By-pass Feed Table[B]: Tray 1[C]: Tray 2[D]: Optional 1 Tray Paper Feed Unit, 2 Tray Paper Feed Unit, or LCT[E]: Optional Duplex Unit[F]: Optional Two-tray Finisher[G]: External Tray[H]: Optional Four-bin Mailbox[I]: Standard Tray (Internal Tray)

The two-tray finisher requires the duplex unit, and either the one-tray paper feedunit, two-tray paper feed unit, or LCT. It also requires the HDD or additionalmemory DIMM (total 128MB or more).

The duplex unit has two exits for the two-tray finisher. When the one-tray paperfeed unit is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the upper exit.When the two-tray paper feed unit or LCT is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the lower exit.

G060D152.WMF

[A]

[B] [C]

[E]

[G] [I]

[F]

[H]

[D]


6-3

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Development drive motor-KThis drives the development unit for black, the fusing unit, and the paper exitsection.

2. Development drive motor-CMYThis drives the development units for magenta, cyan, and yellow, and theregistration roller and by-pass feed mechanism, and the waste toner collectioncoils from the PCUs.

3. Drum drive motor-KThis drives the PCU for black, the collection coil in the waste toner bottle, andthe transfer unit.

4. Drum drive motor-CMYThis drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.

5. Paper feed motorThis drives the paper feed mechanisms for tray 1 and 2.

6. Transfer belt contact motorThis moves the transfer belt into contact and away from the color PCUs.

G060V901.WMF

12

3

4

5

6


6-4

6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE

Overview

The BCU controls all the mechanical components. The IEEE1394 interface board,memory DIMM, and the HDD can be installed on the controller.

The controller connects to the BCU through a PCI bus.

Clutches Sensors Paper TrayUnit

LCT

DuplexUnit

Memory Chip(Toner Cartridge)

OperationPanel

Thermistors

4-binMailbox

Finisher

BCU

Controller

HDD

MemoryDIMMs

IEEE1394Interface

IEEE1284Interface

FusingLamps

Optionalcomponents

Standardcomponents

PCI bus

High Voltage SupplyBoard - T, PA, CL

Motors PolygonMotor LD Boards

Synch.Detectors

High Voltage SupplyBoard - C, B

PSU

G060D551.WMF


6-5

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

Descriptions

1. BCU (Base Engine Control Unit)

The BCU has two CPUs (Main and MUSIC). The CPUs control the followingfunctions:

• Main CPU• Engine sequence• Machine and printer engine operation• Timing for peripherals• High voltage supply, laser, and fusing• Sensors, motors, and solenoids

• MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction) CPU• TD sensor• Line position adjustment• Memory chip on the toner cartridge

2. Controller

The controller handles the following functions:

• Printer-to-host interface• Operation panel interface• Network interface• Interfacing and control of the optional IEEE1394, HDD and DRAM DIMM

3. LD Drive Board

This is the laser diode drive circuit board.

4. IEEE1394 Interface (Option)

This allows computers to connect to this printer using an IEEE1394 interface.

5. HDD Unit (Option)

The HDD unit stores the data for the following.

• Additional soft fonts• Collation• Locked print• Sample print• Downloading forms for form overlay

6. Memory DIMM (Standard: 32MB DRAM, Option: 64/128/256MB DRAM)

This is for additional printer processing memory, used for collation and for softfonts.

7. Operation Panel Board

Controls the display panel, the LED, and the keypad.

8. IEEE1284 Interface

This is a parallel printer port.


6-6

6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS

This machine uses four PCUs, four development units, and four laser beams forcolor printing. Each PCU consists of a drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, andblade. From the left, the PCU stations are black, yellow, cyan, and magenta.

A transfer belt feeds paper past the PCUs, and the toner image on each drum istransferred to the paper.

The paper path is inclined about 38 degrees to make the machine as compact aspossible.

G060D151.WMF

2, 6

3

10

1

5

8

9

7

4


6-7

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

1) Drum charge:The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge

2) Laser exposure:The laser beam from the laser diode (LD) goes through the lens andmirrors and reaches the drum. Turning the laser beam on and off, andcreates a latent image on the drum.

3) Development:The development roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent imageon the drum surface. This machine uses four independent developmentunits (one for each color).

4) Image transfer:The charge applied to the transfer brush attracts the toner from the drum tothe paper. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the paper.

5) Cleaning for OPC drum:The cleaning brush and blade remove any toner remaining on the drumsurface after image transfer to the paper.

6) Quenching for OPC drum:Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laserat the end of every job.

7) Paper attraction:Paper is attracted to the transfer belt by the charge applied to the paperattraction roller.

8) Separation:Paper separates from the transfer belt when the belt curves away from it.

9) Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt:The cleaning roller cleans the belt surface. The grounding roller inside thetransfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.

10) ID sensor:The ID sensor board contains two ID sensors (one at the front, and one atthe rear). The ID sensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on thetransfer belt. The ID sensor output is used for process control and forautomatic line position, skew, and color registration adjustments for thelatent image.

PROCESS CONTROL 23 February, 2001

6-8

6.2 PROCESS CONTROL

6.2.1 OVERVIEW

This machine provides the following two forms of process control:

• Potential control• Toner supply control

The process control facilities of this machine have the following features:

• Two ID (image density) sensors (front and rear). Only the front ID sensor isused for process control. The front and rear ID sensors are used for linepositioning and other adjustments.

• TD (toner density) sensor.

6.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL

Overview

Potential control controls development to maintain the density of the toner imageon the drum. It does this by compensating for variations in drum chargeability andtoner density.

The machine uses the ID sensor to measure the reflectivity of the transfer belt andthe density of a standard sensor pattern. This is done during the process controlself check.

The machine determines the following depending on the ID sensor output and areference table in memory.

• VD: Drum potential without exposure – to adjust this, the machine adjusts thecharge roller voltage.

• VB: Development bias• VL: Drum potential at the strongest exposure – to adjust this, the machine

adjusts the laser power

(In addition, VREF is corrected. This is used for toner supply control.)

This process controls the development potential so that the maximum amount oftoner applied to the drum is constant. However, to control the developmentpotential to improve reproduction of highlight parts of the image, the laser powercontrol method can be changed. This depends on the setting of SP3-125-2. Thedefault setting is 1 (normal control method). To change to the highlight rangecontrol method, set this SP to 2.

If SP3-125-1 is set to 0 (Off), the machine does not do the potential control, butuses the development bias adjusted with SP2-201-1 to -9, the charge roller voltageadjusted with SP2-001-1 to -9, and the laser power selected with SP2-103-1 to -27.However, these SPs should normally not be adjusted in the field.

23 February, 2001 PROCESS CONTROL

6-9

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

Process Control Self Check

This machine carries out potential control using a procedure called the processcontrol self check. There are seven types of process control self check, categorizedaccording to their execution times.

1. Forced

This is done when SP3-126-1 is used.

2. Initial

This starts automatically when the power is turned on, but only if the fusing unitpressure roller temperature is less than 60°C.

3. Interval: Job End

This starts automatically at the end of a print job when the total print counter forthis feature exceeds 200 (this can be changed with SP3-906-1). After anyprocess control is done (except for forced process control), the counters arereset to 0.

4. Interval: Interrupt (default: not done)

This interrupts printing and then starts automatically when the machine makesa certain number (A) of continuous color prints in the same job. After it iscompleted, the machine continues to make prints.

The value A can be adjusted with SP3-906-2 (default: off).

At this time, only VREF is corrected. Potential control (VD, VB, VL correction) isnot done.

5. Non-use Time (default: not done)

This starts before the next print job if the machine has no job for a certain time(M) after it makes more than a certain number (N) of prints.

M is adjusted with SP3-906-4 and N is adjusted with SP3-906-3.

6. After Toner End Recovery

This starts after recovery from a toner end condition.

7. After Developer Initialization

This starts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occursautomatically after a new development unit has been installed.


6-10

6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE

Step 1: VSG Adjustment

This machine uses two ID sensors (direct reflection type). They are located at thefront and rear of the transfer unit. Only the front ID sensor is used for processcontrol. The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belt’s reflectivity and the machinecalibrates the ID sensor until its output (known as VSG) is as follows.

• VSG = 4.0 ± 0.5 Volts

This calibration compensates for the transfer belt’s condition and the ID sensorcondition, such as dirt on the surface of the belt or ID sensor.

Sensor pattern density detection

VSG adjustment

ID sensor solid pattern generation

Sensor pattern density detection

Toner amount calculation

VD, VB, VL selection and VREF adjustment

ID sensor highlight pattern generation

Step 1

VL (LD power) selection

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Step 7

Step 8

Default: off

Start

End

G060D052.WMF


6-11

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation

The machine agitates the developer for 15 seconds, and then makes a 10-gradepattern (12 mm x 15 mm) on the transfer belt for each toner color. Each grade ofthe pattern is a solid color, and is made by changing the development bias andcharge roller voltage. The difference between development bias and charge rollervoltage is always the same.

Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection

The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 solid patterns for each color. Thisdata goes to memory.

Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation

The amount of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) iscalculated for each of the 10 grades of the sensor pattern from the ID sensoroutput value from each grade of the pattern.

Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment

The machine determines the relationship between the amount of toner on thetransfer belt and the development bias for each of the 10 grades. The machinenow selects the development bias and charge roller voltages for the target M/A foreach color by referring to a table in memory.

The way that the laser power (VL) is selected depends on the setting of SP3-125-2.

15 mm

12 mm

G060D154.WMF

TargetM/A

M/A

B Development Bias

Development Bias Charge Bias LD Power

B0 C0 L0

B1 C1 L1

— — —B C L— — —

Bn-1 Cn-1 Ln-1

Bn Cn Ln

G060D002.WMF


6-12

• If it is set to 0, the LD power is fixed at the value of SP2-103-1, to -27.• If it is set to 1, LD power is selected using the same memory table as mentioned

above.• If it is set to 2, LD power is determined by ID sensor highlight pattern generation

(steps 6 to 8 later in this procedure).

The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time so that thedevelopment gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP3-120-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).

After that, the machine cleans the transfer belt by applying a positive dc charge tothe cleaning roller for three rotations of the belt. It does not use the cleaning blade.

Allowable changes to VD, VB, and VL as a result of process control:

This depends on the process control type as follows.

• Forced : No limit• Initial, After Developer Initialization: ± 80 volts• Interval (Job End/ Non-use Time/ During Toner End Recovery): ± 40 volts• Interval (Interrupt): Constant (The memory table is not used.)

Steps 6 to 8 are carried out only if SP3-125-2 is set to 2. (Default: Steps 6 to 8are not used)

Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation

The machine makes a 10-grade (12 mm x 15 mm) on the transfer belt for eachtoner color. The patterns are dot patterns, not solid colors like for the process instep 2. Each grade of the pattern is made using the bias and charge roller voltagesselected above, and the various grades are made by changing the LD power.

Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection

The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 patterns for each color. This datagoes to memory.

15 mm

12 mm

G060D154.WMF


6-13

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection

The machine determines the relationshipbetween the amount of toner on thetransfer belt and the laser power for eachof the 10 grades. The machine nowselects the laser power to get the targetM/A.

After that, the machine cleans thetransfer belt by applying a positive dccharge to the cleaning roller for threerotations of the belt. It does not use thecleaning blade.

TargetM/A

M/A

L LD PowerG060D003.WMF


6-14

6.2.4 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL

Overview

Toner supply control uses the following to determine the amount of toner to besupplied. This is done before every development for each color.

• Density of the toner in the developer (as detected by the TD sensor) - VREF, VT

• Pixel count

The image density is kept constant by adjusting the density of toner in thedevelopment unit, while accommodating to changes in the development conditionsthrough the potential control mechanism. Environmental changes and the numberof prints made are also used in the calculation.

The amount of toner supplied is determined by the ‘on’ time of the toner supplyclutch. The total ‘on’ time for each toner supply clutch is stored in the memory chipfor the relevant toner cartridge. The amount of toner supplied also depends on theprocess line speed for the current job. The machine supplies the calculated amountof toner for each color.

Toner Supply Control Modes

This machine has three toner supply control modes. They are selected with SP2-208-1 to -4.

1. Fuzzy control modeThis is the default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor, ID sensor, andpixel count are used in this mode.

2. Proportional control modeThis mode is used when the ID sensor at the front becomes faulty. Only the TDsensor is used to control toner supply. The machine uses the VREF that isstored in SP2-224-5 to -8.

3. Fixed supply modeThis mode is used when the TD sensor becomes faulty. The amount of tonersupply can be adjusted with SP2-208-5 to -8 if the image density is incorrect(the default setting is 5%).


6-15

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.2.5 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION

Introduction

The machine counts the toner supply clutch ‘on’ time and stores the total ‘on’ timein the memory chip located on each toner cartridge. The machine starts to monitorthe toner near end condition when the toner remaining in the toner cartridge, whichis calculated from the total ‘on’ time, becomes less than 100 g.

However, in certain conditions, toner end will be detected regardless of how muchremaining toner is calculated. See the Note in Toner End Detection below.

Toner Near End Detection

The machine flags a “toner near end condition” when the following condition isdetected for a toner color.

• VREF + 0.4 V < VT (ten times consecutively)

Toner End Detection

The machine flags a “toner end condition” when one of the following conditions aredetected for a toner color.

• VREF + 0.8 V < VT (ten times consecutively)• The pixel counter counts up the equivalent of 5 A4 sheets of pixels (100%

coverage) since near-end was detected.

However, if fewer pages have been made since near-end than the numberguaranteed with SP 2-212-11 (default: 10 pages), printing will continue.

NOTE: If one of the following conditions are detected 10 consecutive times, themachine flags a “toner end condition” regardless of the toner supply clutch‘on’ time or the number of pages printed since near-end.• VREF + 1.2 V < VT

• VT > 4.8 V

After the machine detects toner end for black, it cannot print until the tonercartridge is replaced. If toner end is detected for cyan, magenta or yellow, themachine can print with black and white only; color printing is disabled.

Toner End Recovery

The machine detects that the toner cartridge has been replaced if the upper rightcover is opened and closed when a near-end or end condition exists. The machinethen starts to supply toner to the development unit. After supplying toner, themachine clears the toner end condition if the machine detects the proper VT.


6-16

6.2.6 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION

When the machine detects that a new development unit has been installed, itinitializes the developer.

To do this, the machine agitates the developer for about 90 seconds, and adjustsVCNT (control voltage for TD sensor) so that VT (TD sensor output) becomes 3.0 ±0.1 volts. The machine stores this VT as VREF.

VCNT is corrected for the current humidity every print job. VCNT is also corrected forthe total number of prints, to prevent the developer Q/M from varying.

If the humidity correction is giving poor results (for example, if the humidity sensoris broken), it can be disabled with SP2-223-2. Then a value for VCNT must be inputmanually using SP2-224-1 to -4 (adjust by trial and error).

During developer initialization, the machine forcibly supplies toner because there isno toner inside the toner transport tube at installation. Then the machine does theprocess control self check.

23 February, 2001 LASER EXPOSURE

6-17

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.3 LASER EXPOSURE

6.3.1 OVERVIEW

1. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-E

2. LD unit-Y

3. LD unit-K

4. LD Mirror-M

5. LD unit-M

6. LD unit-C

7. F-theta lens-M, C

8. Synchronizing detector board-M, C-S

9. Synchronizing detector board-M, C-E

10. OPC drum-M

11. WTL

12. OPC drum-C

13. OPC drum-Y

14. OPC drum- K

15. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-S

16. F-theta lens-Y, K

17. Polygon mirror motor

18. LD Mirror-K

This machine uses four LD units and one polygon mirror motor to produce a latentimage on four OPC drums (one drum for each color toner).There are two hexagonal mirrors. Each mirror reflects beams from two LD units.The LD unit for black has two laser diodes to do dual beam writing (this is onlydone for black-and-white printing; for full color printing, only one of the beams isused).Laser exposure for magenta and cyan starts from the rear side of the drum, but foryellow and black it starts from the front side of the drum. This is because the unitsfor magenta and cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirror from the units foryellow and black.

G060D252.WMF

12

3

5

6

8

9

7

12

16

13

14

15

17

11

18

4

10

LASER EXPOSURE 23 February, 2001

6-18

6.3.2 OPTICAL PATH

The laser beams for cyan [A] and yellow [B] are directed to the upper part of thepolygon mirror [C], and those for magenta [D] and black [E] are directed to thelower part of the polygon motor. The LD mirrors (see the previous page) deflect thelaser beams for magenta and black towards the lower polygon mirror.

The WTL [F] corrects the main scan line; without this component, the line bendsout towards the middle of the main scan. The central bend of the WTL is adjustedin the factory.

The speed of the polygon mirror depends on the selected mode (see below).

ModeResolution

(dpi)Polygon motor

speed (rpm)Process linespeed (mm/s)

Print speed(ppm)

Remarks

600 x 6001,200 x 600

21,850 185 38B/W(exceptOHP/Thickpaper) 1,200 x 1,200 29,528 125 28

Dual beamwriting

600 x 6001,200 x 600

29,528 125 28Color(exceptOHP/Thickpaper) 1,200 x 1,200 29,528 62.5 14

OHP/Thick 600 x 6001,200 x 600

1,200 x 1,20029,528 62.5 10

G060D201.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]

[C]

[F]


6-19

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.3.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR

Overview

The machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards (LSD), one at eachcorner of the laser optics housing unit.

Each pair of boards detects two colors. The machine recognizes each color fromthe time that they are detected. The two LSDs [A] at the right are used for magentaand cyan, and the two [B] at the left are used for yellow and black.

Main Scan Start Detection

For magenta and cyan, the LSD at the rear detects the start of the main scan. Foryellow and black, the LSD at the front detects the start of the main scan.

Clock Frequency Adjustment

Each pair ensures that the number of laser clock pulses in the main scan isconstant. If the count for one particular beam varies from normal, the LD clockfrequency for that beam is adjusted.

If the board at the end position is defective, this cannot be detected. Switch thedetection feature off with SP2-919-1.

G060D202.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]


6-20

6.3.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING

Dual Beam Mechanism

The LD unit for black has two laser diodes. Each face of the polygon mirror writestwo main scan lines. This only happens for black and white printing.

Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism

The machine changes the main scan resolution between 600 and 1,200 dpi forblack and white by rotating the LD unit [A], except for OHPs and thick paper.

Both LD unit positions are fixed distances from the LD home position sensor [B].When the number of times that the resolution has changed reaches a certainnumber, the LD positioning motor moves the LD unit to the home position, andthen to the proper position.

After the laser optics housing unit has been replaced, the beam pitch for 600 dpiand 1200 dpi must be adjusted (SP2-109-2, -3).

G060D253.WMF

[A]

[B]


6-21

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.3.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH

PSU

BCU

LDB (K)CN401-48 (K)

CN401-49 (K)

E-MAC

LDB (Y)CN401-48 (Y)

CN401-49 (Y)

E-MAC

LDB (M)CN401-48 (M)

CN401-49 (M)

E-MAC

LDB (C)CN401-48 (C)

CN401-49 (C)

E-MAC

CN221-3

CN221-2

CN222-3

CN222-2

CN223-3

CN223-2

CN224-3

CN224-2

CN101-10LD5VCN350-6

RELAY

CN361-2

Front Door andLeft Door SW

CN361-1

+24V +5V

Right Door SW

G060D204.WMF

A relay on the PSU ensurestechnician and user safety andprevents the laser beam frominadvertently switching on duringservicing. This relay turns off whenthe front cover, upper left cover, orright cover is opened, and cuts thepower (+5V) supplied to the LDboard for each color through theBCU.

Two safety switches are used to turnthe relay off. One switch is used forthe front cover and upper left cover.This safety switch is off when eitherthe front cover or upper left cover isopened. Another safety switch isused for the right cover.

E-MAC: Enhanced Modulation ASICon CMOS

LDB: LD Drive Board (included in theLD Unit)


6-22

6.3.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENTS

Overview

The machine automatically adjusts the following items by drawing lines (1 mm x 20mm) on the transfer belt and measuring them using the two ID sensors (one at thefront and one at the rear). The machine generates eight sets of these lines for eachcolor on both sides (front and rear) of the transfer belt, and averages the resultsfrom measuring these sets.

1. Sub scan line position for YCM based on the line position for K (colorregistration)

2. Main scan line position for KYCM3. Magnification ratio for KYCM4. Skew for YCM based on the line position for K

Front

KY11

KC11

KM11

K11

Y11

C11

M11

KY12

KC12

KM12

K12

Y12

C12

M12

K

Y

C

M

K

Y

C

M

Rear

G060D205.WMF


6-23

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

The machine automatically executes the adjustment when it detects one of thefollowing:

1. Depends on setting of SP5-993-1. The default is as follows:• If a process control self check is done (except after toner end recovery and

developer initialization)• New PCU installed• If the temperature measured by the sensor on the laser optics housing unit

differs by 5°C from the temperature at the previous adjustment when a colorprinting job starts, or during a printing job, or at any time during standbymode.

2. When the user or technician starts the adjustment with a user tool or SP5-993-2NOTE: The skew adjustment is done only if a PCU is replaced with a new one

or a forced image position adjustment is executed with SP5-993-2 or aUP mode.

After measuring the patterns, the machine cleans the transfer belt by applying apositive dc charge to the cleaning roller and turns the belt three full rotations.

If an error is detected three times consecutively, SC285 is generated.

Sub Scan Line Position for YCM

The machine measures the gaps between lines of each color on the pattern on thetransfer belt. If the gaps are not correct, the machine moves the image for therequired color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this, it changes the laser writetiming for that color.

Main Scan Line Position for KYCM

If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, itchanges the laser write start timing for each scan line.

Magnification Adjustment

If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes theLD clock frequency for the required color.


6-24

Main Scan Skew Adjustment

The 3rd mirror positioning motors [A] for magenta, cyan, and yellow each adjust theangle of the 3rd mirror [B], based on the 3rd mirror position for black. This correctsmain scan skew.

G060D254.WMF

[A]

[B]

23 February, 2001 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6-25

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.4 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.4.1 OVERVIEW

1. Cleaning brush roller

2. Charge roller (non-contact)

3. OPC drum

4. Cleaning brush

5. Waste toner collection auger

6. Cleaning blade

This machine has four independent PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU consistsof an OPC drum, non-contact charge roller, cleaning brush, and cleaning blade.The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm).

The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined bythe drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not adjustable in the field.

The push switches in the drum positioning plate detect when a new PCU has beeninstalled.

G060D301.WMF

12

3

4

5

6

PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT 23 February, 2001

6-26

6.4.2 DRIVE

The drum drive motor-K [A] drives the PCU for black. It also drives the transfer unit.

The drum drive motor-CMY [B] drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.Using one motor to drive these three drums reduces CMY color misalignment.

G060D302.WMF

[A]

[B]


6-27

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.4.3 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING

This machine uses a non-contact charge roller [A] to reduce ozone. The non-contact charge roller gives the drum surface a negative charge. The high voltagesupply board – C, B, which is located at the rear of the machine, applies a dc andac voltage (at a constant current) to the roller. The ac voltage helps to ensure thatthe charge given to the drum is as uniform as possible.

The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage, if automatic processcontrol is enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to 0). However, if process control isswitched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to 1), the dc voltage is the value stored inSP2-001-1 to -9 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).

The diameter of the roller is 35 mm (circumference about 110 mm). The gapbetween drum and charge roller is about 50 µm.

The cleaning brush roller [B], which always contacts the charge roller, cleans thecharge roller.

The charge roller can generate small amounts of nitrogen oxide gases (known asNOx), which may be absorbed by the surface of the drum. This can causeunfocused copies. As a result, the film of NOx is removed at power on, at the endof a job (if more than 200 prints), and when a toner cartridge has been replaced.SP3-920-1 to -4 determine when this procedure (known as ‘refresh mode’) is done.It can also be executed at any time if the prints are smeared (using SP3-920-5).

Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at theend of every job.

G060D303.WMF

[A]

[B]


6-28

6.4.4 DRUM CLEANING

The cleaning brush [A] spreads out the waste toner remaining on the drum. Thecleaning blade [B] then scrapes it off. The toner collection auger [C] transports thetoner towards the waste toner collection bottle.

G060D305.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]


6-29

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.4.5 WASTE TONER COLLECTION

The waste toner from the collection augers in the four PCUs drops into the wastetoner collection duct [A] at the rear of the PCU. The toner collection coils [B, C, D]in the duct transport this waste toner towards the waste toner bottle (M [E], C [F], Y[G], K [H]). The coils are driven by the development drive motor-CMY.

The toner [I] from the transfer unit drops directly into the waste toner bottle [J].

There are two holes in the waste toner collection duct. If the toner is unable to dropthrough the hole [K] at the centre of the bottle, it is transported to the end of theduct and drops into the bottle through the hole [L] at the end.

G060D306.WMF

[A]

[B]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I]

[J][K][L]

[C]

[D]


6-30

6.4.6 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION

The waste toner bottle set switch [A] detects when the bottle is placed in themachine.

The waste toner sensor [B] detects the weight of the bottle and informs when it isalmost full.

When the bottle contains a certain amount of waste toner, the sensor isdeactivated. The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is almost full anddisplays ”Waste Toner is Almost Full”.

After that, the machine can print 1,000 more sheets. After printing 1,000 sheets, itdisplays ”Replace Waste Toner”, and after the end of the job, the printer cannot beused until the bottle is replaced or emptied.

G060D315.WMF

[A][B]


6-31

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.4.7 PCU DETECTION (DEVELOPMENT UNIT DETECTION)

The drum positioning plate [A] contains eight push switches [B]. These detect whena new PCU or a new development unit has just been installed. They also detect ifthe PCUs and development units are in the machine.

Each PCU and each development unit includes a pin [C], which activates theswitch when the drum positioning plate is closed. On a new unit, this pin does notactivate the switch. When the unit is driven for the first time, the pin comes out andactivates the switch.

After the machine is turned on or the front cover is closed, the machine checkseach switch (result 1 in the table). Then the machine drives the PCUs anddevelopment units for 5 seconds and checks each switch again (result 2 in thetable). The condition detected by the machine depends on the combination ofresults, as shown below.

Result 1 Result 2 Detection Action

OFF OFF

The PCU or development unit isnot placed in the machine, or thedrum positioning plate is notsecured by the two screws.

The machine displays anerror message.

OFF ONA new PCU or development unithas just been installed.

The machine resets thecounter for the PCU ordevelopment unit.

ON ONThe current PCU ordevelopment unit is present.

The machine goes to standbymode.

NOTE: If some PCUs or development units are not installed, the machine displayserror messages in the following order.(M dev→M PCU→C dev→C PCU→Y dev→Y PCU→K dev→K PCU)

G060D307.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

DEVELOPMENT 23 February, 2001

6-32

6.5 DEVELOPMENT

6.5.1 OVERVIEW

1. Doctor blade

2. Developer hopper

3. Mixing auger (right)

4. TD sensor

5. Mixing auger (left)

6. Development roller

This machine has four independent development units, one for each color. Eachcontains 280 g of developer when new. The developer in each unit is supplied tothe development roller by the two mixing augers and attracted onto the surface ofthe roller.

The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined bythe drum positioning plate and the rear shaft, and is not adjustable in the field.

The push switches in the drum positioning plate detect when a new developmentunit has been installed, and detect whether the development unit is in the machine.

The TD sensor and front ID sensor control toner density. Each development unithas a TD sensor.

The diameter of the development roller is 18 mm (circumference about 56.5 mm).

G060D301.WMF

1

2

3

45

6

23 February, 2001 DEVELOPMENT

6-33

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.5.2 DRIVE

The development drive motor-K [A] drives the development roller for black throughgears and a clutch. This motor also drives the fusing unit and paper exit rollers.The gear trains are indicated in the diagram by dotted lines.

The development drive motor-CMY [B] drives the development unit for magenta,cyan, and yellow through gears and clutches. This motor also drives theregistration roller and by-pass feed table.

G060D311.WMF

G060D310.WMF

[A]

[B]


6-34

6.5.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION

Two mixing augers [A and B] circulate the developer forward and backward toagitate the developer.

This happens during the process control self check, during toner supply, andduring development.

G060D308.WMF[A][B]


6-35

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.5.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

The high voltage supply board – C, B [A] supplies development bias to thedevelopment roller via a receptacle [B] at the rear of each development unit.

There are both ac and dc bias voltages. The ac bias improves toner transfer to thedrum.

The machine automatically controls the dc bias, if automatic process control isenabled (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to 0). However, if process control is switched off,(i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to 1), the dc bias is the value stored in SP2-201-1 to -9 (donot adjust in the field unless advised to do so).

The ac bias cannot be adjusted.

6.5.5 DEVELOPMENT UNIT DETECTION

This is the same as PCU detection. See “Photoconductor Unit – PCU Detection’.

G060D309.WMF

[A]

[B]


6-36

6.5.6 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM

Overview

An air transport system agitates the toner in the toner cartridges [A]. Toner istransported from the toner cartridge to the development unit [B] by the tonerattraction pump [C] (each cartridge has a separate pump). This provides a morestable way to transport a fine powder than previous methods.

Toner Agitation

The air pump supplies air to the toner cartridge and air mixes with the toner andagitates all the toner in the cartridge. One air pump [D] and four valves [E] controlthe air flow.

The air pump turns on to supply air to the toner cartridge for one second at thefollowing times:

• During normal operation, when the ‘on’ time for a toner supply clutch reachesa certain value

• When forced toner supply (SP2-207) is done• When forced toner density adjustment (SP3-126-2) is done• At toner end recovery• Developer initialization

The filter [F] in the inner package of the toner cartridge ensures that the internalpressure does not become too high.

The toner mixed with air becomes a fluid, and passes part of the way along thetransport tube towards the toner attraction pump. This pump draws the toner therest of the way (see the next page).

G060D313.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E]

[F]


6-37

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

Toner Transport

Each toner attraction pumphas the following mechanism.

The pump (toner attraction pump) [A], which consists of the toner supply clutch [B],rubber tube [C], and a rotor [D], attracts the toner in the toner transport tube [E]toward the development unit.

The toner supply clutch drives the rotor, which draws the toner in from the cartridgeand passes it to the development unit. Each time the clutch comes on to supplytoner, it turns on for 0.7 s and off for 1.3 s. The number of times that the clutchturns on depends on the amount of toner to be supplied, which depends on theresults of toner supply control.

Motor drive comes from the development drive motors.

G060D314.WMF

[A]

[B][C] [D]

[E]


6-38

Shutter Mechanism

The development unit and toner attraction pump each have a shutter mechanism.When the development unit is placed in the machine, the protrusion [A] on thedevelopment unit opens the shutter [B] in the pump, and the protrusion [C] on thepump opens the shutter [D] in the development unit. When both shutters are open,toner can enter the development unit from the toner attraction pump.

When the development is removed, the shutter spring [E and F] pulls and closesthe shutter.

6.5.7 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION

A memory chip [A] on each toner cartridge stores the total ‘on’ time of the tonersupply clutch. This is used to calculate the amount of toner remaining in the tonercartridge. The chip also detects whether the cartridge is installed (if the cartridge isnot installed, the machine does not detect a signal from the memory chip).

G060D312.WMF

G060D316.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

[D]

[E][F]

[A]


6-39

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.6 PAPER FEED

6.6.1 OVERVIEW

1. Pick-up roller - tray 1

2. Feed roller - tray 1

3. Separation roller - tray 1

4. Relay roller

5. Registration roller

6. Feed roller - By-pass feed

7. Pick-up roller - By-pass feed

8. By-pass feed table

9. Separation roller - By-pass feed

10. Transport roller

11. Vertical transport roller

12. Feed roller - tray 2

13. Separation roller - tray 2

14. Pick-up roller - tray 2

15. Paper tray 2

16. Paper tray 1

There are two paper trays (500 sheets each), and a by-pass feed table (100sheets).

The paper feed mechanism uses an FRR system.

Tray 1 can only hold A4 or letter paper. Tray 2 can hold a range of sizes.

G060D101.WMF

54

9

31 2

7

6

8

10

12

13141516

11


6-40

6.6.2 DRIVE – TRAYS 1 AND 2

The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanisms in both tray 1 [B]and 2 [C] using clutches and complex trains of gears (the locations of the geartrains are indicated by dotted lines in the above diagram).

When the paper tray is inside the machine, the pick-up roller [D] is always incontact with the top sheet of the paper stack. When the paper feed clutch [E] turnson, the pick-up, feed [F], and separation [G] rollers start rotating to feed the paper.The paper feed clutch stays on until shortly after the registration sensor activates.

G060D105.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[D]

[E][F]

[G]


6-41

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.6.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2

The tray 1 set switch [A] and tray 2 paper size switches [B] detect when the papertrays [C] are placed in the machine. When the machine detects that a tray hasbeen placed in the machine, the tray lift motor [D] rotates and the coupling gear [E]on the tray lift motor engages the pin [F] on the lift arm shaft [G]. Then the tray liftarm [H] lifts the tray bottom plate [I] until the paper lift sensor for the tray detectsthat the top of the stack is at the paper feed position.

G060D102.WMF

[A]

[D]

[C]

[E][F]

[G]

[H]

[D]

[I]

[C]

[B]

[B]


6-42

6.6.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

For tray 1, there is no size switch. The paper size is fixed at either A4 or LT; thiscan be changed with SP1-902-1.

For tray 2, four paper size switches, working in combination, detect the paper sizeas shown in the table below. The actuators are on the side plate [A]. The side plateis moved by the end plate [B] through a cam [C].

Models Switch LocationNorth America Europe/Asia 1 [D] 2 [E] 3 [F] 4 [G]11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 1 0 0

A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 081/2" x 14" SEF *1 B4 SEF *1 1 1 0 181/2" x 11" SEF *2 A4 SEF *2 0 1 1 011" x 81/2" LEF *3 11" x 81/2" LEF *3 1 0 1 1

A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1

1: Pushed

Notes:*1: The machine detects either 8½” x 14” SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2*2: The machine detects either 8½” x 11” SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3*3: The machine detects either 11” x 8½” LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4

The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected(if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).

G060D104.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E] [F]

[G]


6-43

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.6.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

Two paper height sensors, working in combination, detect the amount of paper inthe tray.

When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever moves upand the actuator [A] (on the pressure lever drive shaft) rotates.

Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 [B] Paper height sensor 1 [C]Full OFF OFF

Nearly full ON OFFNear end ON ON

Almost empty OFF ON

OFF: No actuator

6.6.6 PAPER END DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

If there is some paper in the paper tray, the paper stack raises the paper end feelerand the paper end sensor deactivates.

When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout inthe tray bottom plate, and this activates the paper end sensor.

G060D103.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]


6-44

6.6.7 REGISTRATION

The development drive motor - CMY [A] drives the registration roller [B] using aclutch and a complex train of gears (the location of the gear train is indicated bydotted lines in the above diagram).

The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew.The paper buckle can be adjusted with SP1-003-1 to - 8.

G060D106.WMF

[A]

[B]


6-45

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.6.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED

This machine has three process line speeds (for feed from registration roller tofusing unit) depending on the selected resolution

ModeResolution

(dpi)Line speed

(mm/s)Print speed

(ppm)600 x 600

1,200 x 600185 38

B/W

1,200 x 1,200 125 28600 x 600

1,200 x 600125 28

Color

1,200 x 1,200 62.5 14OHP/Thick 600 x 600

1,200 x 6001,200 x 1,200

62.5 10

During a monochrome print job, the machine changes the line speed if there is apage with color in the middle of the job. However, it will not change the line speed ifthere is a monochrome page in the middle of a color print job.

Line speed (mm/s)Paper feed from tray to registration roller 230Fusing, paper exit to standard tray, and mailbox A bit slower than “Process line speed”Duplex invert and feed 370Finisher 450


6-46

6.6.9 BY-PASS TRAY

The development drive motor - CMY [A] drives the by-pass tray using a clutch anda complex train of gears (the location of the gear train is indicated by dotted lines inthe above diagram).

To feed paper, the by-pass pick-up solenoid (not shown in the diagram) moves thepick-up roller into contact with the top of the stack.

Paper size and end detection are done in the usual manner.

G060D106.WMF

[A]

23 February, 2001 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6-47

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.7 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.7.1 OVERVIEW

1. Transfer belt

2. Paper attraction roller

3. Back-up roller

4. Transfer charge brush

5. Toner collection auger

6. Cleaning roller

7. Cleaning blade

8. ID sensor

9. Transfer belt drive roller

Paper is fed to the transfer belt before image transfer begins. The paper attractionroller charges the paper to ensure that the paper is attracted to the belt.

The magenta, cyan, yellow, and black color images transfer to the paper while thetransfer belt feeds the paper past the drums towards the fusing unit. A positivecharge is applied to the paper under the transfer belt, opposite each drum, totransfer the toner from the drums onto the paper. The back-up roller ensures thatthe contact area between the drum and belt is sufficient.

The cleaning unit in the transfer unit cleans the belt surface by applying a charge toa cleaning roller. The waste toner collected from the belt is transported to the wastetoner bottle.

There are two ID sensors. Only the front one detects the image density of thepatterns generated on the transfer belt for process control. The other function ofthe ID sensors is for automatic line position adjustment. Both sensors are used forthis.

G060D401.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION 23 February, 2001

6-48

6.7.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE

The drum drive motor-K [A] drives the transfer belt [B] and the cleaning unit viasome gears. The speed of transfer belt drive depends on the process line speed.

G060D402.WMF

[A]

[B]


6-49

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.7.3 TRANSFER AND CLEANING CURRENT

The transfer charge brush [A] applies a current to transfer the toner to the paper[B].

The high voltage supply board – T, PA, CL [C] applies a current to the brush, paperattraction roller [D], and cleaning roller [E].

These currents, except for cleaning, are automatically corrected for paper size,temperature (measured by the thermistor on the right side of the laser opticshousing unit), and humidity (measured by the humidity sensor).

Available adjustments are summarized below.

• The transfer brush current for each printing mode (color or B/W, resolution, papertype) can be adjusted with SP2-301-1 to -56. The by-pass tray settings are usedwhen the duplex unit has not been installed and the user is making duplex printsmanually from the by-pass tray. There is a correction for narrow-width paper withSP2-309-1 to -4.

• The current for paper attraction can be adjusted with SP2-801-1 to -9. There is acorrection for narrow-width paper with SP2-801-10 to -13.

• The current for cleaning cannot be adjusted.

The back-up rollers [F] before the transfer charge brushes for each color make awider contact area between the drum [G] and the belt. The other rollers aregrounded to neutralize the belt surface.

G060D404.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]


6-50

6.7.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING

The transfer belt cleaning unit [A] removes toner on the belt after printing, the IDsensor patterns for process control, and the ID sensor patterns for automatic lineposition adjustment.

The cleaning roller [B] always contacts the transfer belt [C], and attracts wastetoner from the belt (the cleaning roller is electrically charged). The blade [D] in thecleaning unit scrapes the toner off the cleaning roller. The toner collection auger [E]transports the toner towards the waste toner collection bottle.

G060D405.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

[D]

[E]


6-51

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.7.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT

Mechanism

The transfer belt contact and release mechanism improves the lifetime of thetransfer belt and drums.

The drum for black always contacts the belt, but the transfer belt moves away fromthe other drums during monochrome printing.

In standby mode, the transfer belt contacts only the black drum. When the machineprints a color page, the machine waits until the previous page has gone throughthe transfer unit. Then the transfer belt contact motor [A] turns on and a cam [B]moves the lower end of the transfer belt upwards so that it contacts the other threedrums.

The transfer belt home position [C] and contact [D] sensors detect the transfer beltpositions, as follows:

B/W printing(default position)

Moving tocolor

printingposition

→

Colorprinting

Movingback to the

defaultposition

→

Defaultposition

HP sensor [C] On On Off Off Off On OnContact sensor [D] Off On On Off On On Off

Off: Actuator not inside sensor

The machine does not release the transfer belt from the color drums during the job,even if a monochrome page comes again. This is because the total printing speedreduces if the transfer belt changes position often.

To pull out the transfer belt, the user moves the release lever and the belt movesdown and away from all four drums. Then the unit can be pulled out.

G060D403.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]


6-52

ACS (Auto Color Sensing) Mode

The machine can print in color or monochrome mode (selected with the printerdriver). In color mode, ACS can be switched on or off with a user tool (default: on).

If ACS is on, the transfer belt stays in the default position (against the K drum only)until a page with color data on it appears. The transfer belt then moves against allfour drums and stays there until the end of the job, even if some K only pagesappear.

If ACS is off, all data is printed with the transfer belt positioned against all fourdrums. The belt does not move even if a K only page appears, even if it is at thestart of the job.

Color Developing

ACS: On

K developing

K K Color Color K K

Color Developing

ACS: Off

K K Color Color K K

Color

Color

G060D406.WMF


6-53

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.8 FUSING

6.8.1 OVERVIEW

1. Oil supply roller

2. Oil supply pad

3. Fusing belt

4. Heating roller thermistor

5. Heating roller thermostat

6. Heating roller

7. Heating roller fusing lamp

8. Pressure roller thermofuse

9. Pressure roller thermistor

10. Pressure roller fusing lamp

11. Pressure roller

12. Hot roller

13. Junction gate

14. Cleaning roller

• A belt fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventionalhot and pressure roller system.

• The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusingbelt quickly.

• The hot roller is made of sponge, which flattens slightly, also increasing thefusing nip. This roller does not contain a fusing lamp.

• The heating and pressure rollers each have a fusing lamp.• 770W for the heating roller, 350W for the pressure roller

• The heating roller thermistor and pressure roller thermistor control thetemperature of these lamps.

• Temperature is normally controlled by turning the fusing lamps on and off. Tochange between on/off control and phase control: SP1-104-1

G060D501.WMF

1 2

3

4

5

6

7

891011

12

13

14


6-54

6.8.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE

• The development drive motor-K drives the pressure roller [A], hot roller [B], oilsupply roller [C], and belt cleaning roller [D] through a gear train.

• The heating roller [E] is driven by the pressure with the fusing belt [F].

G060D503.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]


6-55

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.8.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Fusing Temperatures

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stayson until the thermistor detects the standby temperature. Then the CPU raises thetemperature to the printing temperature.

The fusing temperature for each mode is as follows.

ModeResolution

(dpi)Temperature ofHeating Roller

Temperature ofPressure Roller

Note

Energy saverlevel 1 100°C 130°C

Standby mode165°C 135°C

If SP1-104-025 is set to 4

1200 x 1200 140°C 120°CColor1200 x 600600 x 600 170°C 150°C

1200 x 1200 165°C 145°CBlack and white1200 x 600600 x 600 175°C 155°C

OHP All 170°C 150°CThick All 175°C 155°C

1200 x 1200 135°C 115°CColor(duplex back side) 1200 x 600

600 x 600 160°C 140°C

1200 x 1200 155°C 135°CBlack and white(duplex back side) 1200 x 600

600 x 600 165°C 145°C

The heating and pressure roller temperatures for fusing are stored in SP1-105-3 to-28.

When the machine is switched on, the fusing lamp temperatures increase to thethose specified by SP1-104-25.

The print ready temperature is slightly less than the fusing temperature. Thedifference is specified by SP1-105-1 and -2.


6-56

Temperature Corrections

To prevent excessive glossiness caused by fusing temperature overshoot, thereare the following SP modes:

• 1-913: Fusing temperature is reduced after this number of pages during the job.• 1-914: This shows how much the temperature is reduced

If a job using OHP or thick paper starts while the fusing unit is still warm, the fusingtemperature could be higher than the target for this type of paper, causing markson the output. To prevent this problem, we have the following SP modes:

• 1-996-4, 5: These SPs specify a limit, above which printing will not start.

Overheat Protection

• If the heating or pressure roller temperature becomes greater than 200°C, theCPU cuts off the power to the fusing lamp. SC543 for the heating roller or SC553for the pressure roller is generated.

• If thermistor overheat protection fails, there is a thermostat for the heating rollerand a themofuse for the pressure roller in series with the common ground line ofthe fusing lamp.

• If the thermostat temperature becomes greater than 210°C, the thermostatopens, removing power from the fusing lamp.

• If the thermofuse temperature becomes greater than 169°C, the thermofuseopens, removing power from the fusing lamp.

• At this time, the machine stops operation.


6-57

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.8.4 OIL SUPPLY AND CLEANING

• The oil supply mechanism makes it easier for paper to separate from the fusingbelt and roller after fusing.

• The oil [A] from the oil supply pad [B] is supplied to the oil supply roller [C]. Theoil supply roller rotates and supplies a bit of oil to the fusing belt.

• The oil supply solenoid [A] moves the oil supply roller into contact with the fusingbelt. It stays in contact at all times during fusing. At other times, it moves away toreduce oil consumption.

G060D505.WMF

G060D508.WMF

[A][B]

[C]

[A]


The oil supply solenoid [A] moves the oil supply pad into contact with the oil supply roller. It stays in contact at all times during fusing. At other times, it moves away to reduce oil consumption.


6-58

6.8.5 NEW FUSING OIL SUPPLY UNIT DETECTION

The fusing oil supply unit [A] contains a fuse [B] in a circuit between the fusing unitand the BCU board. The fuse opens shortly after a new unit has been installed inthe machine, and the power switched on. When the power is turned on or the leftcover is closed, the BCU checks whether a new fusing oil supply unit is installed bychecking the fuse condition. If the fusing oil supply unit has been replaced, themachine detects the new unit and automatically resets the counter for the unit.

Oil near-end is detected by counting the number of prints made. The machineindicates oil near-end 2,500 sheets before the life of the oil supply unit runs out.This timing can be changed with SP7-905-9.

G060D507.WMF

[A]

[B]


6-59

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.8.6 NEW FUSING UNIT DETECTION

The new fusing unit contains a spring [A] as part of a circuit connected to the BCU.

After a new unit has been installed in the machine and the fusing pressure roller isdriven for the first time, a pin [B] on the fusing pressure roller picks off the springand the looped wire circuit opens.

When the power is turned on or the left cover is closed, the BCU checks whetherthe looped wire circuit is open or closed. If the fusing unit has just been replaced,the circuit is still closed, and the machine detects the new unit. It then automaticallyresets the counter for the unit.

The fusing unit’s life is detected by counting the number of prints made. Themachine indicates near-end 2,500 sheets before the life of the unit runs out. Thistiming can be changed with SP7-905-7.

G060D506.WMF

[A][B]


6-60

6.8.7 ENERGY SAVER MODE

When the machine is not being used, the energy saver feature reduces powerconsumption by switching off the fusing lamp. This machine has two energy savermodes.

Level 1 Energy Saver Mode

Level 1 energy saver mode starts 20 seconds after the machine has completed aprint. In this mode, the fusing lamps are intermittently turned on and off to keep theheating roller at 100°C and pressure roller at 130°C.

The machine leaves this mode when one of the following happens.

• Print command received from the PC• Any cover opened and closed• Any operation panel keys pressed

Level 2 Energy Saver Mode

Level 2 energy saver mode starts after the machine has been idle for a certaintime. This time is specified by a user tool. During level 2 energy saver mode, bothlamps switch off.

• Off (energy saver mode never activates)• 5 minutes• 15 minutes• 30 minutes• 45 minutes• 60 minutes (default)

When the machine is in this mode, the machine turns off +24V, +12V, and +5Vlines. However, only +5VE lines, for the controller and GAPCI (voltage monitoringASIC) on the BCU, are still active.

The machine leaves energy saver mode when one of the following happens.

• Print command received from the PC• Any operation panel keys pressed

NOTE: The machine does not leave level 2 energy saver mode when covers areopened and closed, because the CPU on the BCU is not active.


Incorrect Default is disabled. If the user enables, the default is 30 s. Adjust the timer with SP 5-101-3 (0: disabled)

23 February, 2001 PAPER EXIT

6-61

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.9 PAPER EXIT

6.9.1 OVERVIEW

[A]: To standard paper tray[B]: To external paper tray[C]: Junction gate[D]: Paper exit sensor[E]: Paper overflow sensor

• After fusing, the junction gate feeds paper to the standard paper tray or theexternal paper tray. The junction gate solenoid controls the junction gate asfollows.

• To feed paper to the standard paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is off(default).

• To feed paper to the external paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is on.• The development drive roller-K drives the exit rollers.

G060D504.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D] [E]

PAPER EXIT 23 February, 2001

6-62

6.9.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION

[A]: Paper overflow sensor

• When the paper overflow sensor [A] is activated, the machine detects that thepaper stack height has exceeded a certain limit and stops printing.

G060D601.WMF

[A]

23 February, 2001 CONTROLLER

6-63

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.10 CONTROLLER

6.10.1 OVERVIEW

The controller uses GW (Grand Workware) architecture.

1. CPU: QED RM7000 (250 MHz)

2. COMIC (Color Model IC): GW architecture ASIC. It uses a 100 MHz bus (64bit) for interfacing with CPU and memory. It controls the interface with the CPUand also controls the following functions: memory, local bus, interrupts, PCIbus, video data, HDD, network, operation panel, IEEE1284, and imageprocessing.

3. SDRAM DIMM (2 slots): 32 MB SDRAM (resident), expandable up to 384 MBwith a 64 MB, 128 MB, or 256 MB SDRAM.

4. Flash ROM: 2 MB flash ROM programmed for network applications

5. ROM DIMM (3 slots): The DIMM installed in the machine includes 8 MB flashROM programmed for system, printer, PCL5c, PS3, and RPCS applications.This DIMM also includes 8 kB of Mask ROM for storing internal printer fonts.Currently the remaining two DIMM slots are not being used.

6. NVRAM: 8 kB NVRAM for storing the printer parameters and logged data

7. IEEE1284 Interface: Supports compatible, nibble, and ECP modes

COMIC

Flash ROM2MB

NVRAM8kB

NVRAMBoard 64kB

IC Card

CPU

SDRAMDIMM x 2

IEEE1394I/F

HDD

NVRAM I/F IC Card I/F

Flash ROMDIMM 8MB

ROM DIMM I/F

PHYNetwork

I/F

IEEE1284I/F

PCII/F

IDEI/F

SDRAM DIMM I/F RAPI

BCU

Controller

G060D553.WMF

CONTROLLER 23 February, 2001

6-64

8. Network Interface: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T

9. NVRAM board (option): 64 kB NVRAM used for storing a record of thenumber of pages printed under each “User Code”.

10. IEEE1394 Interface (option): See the IEEE1394 Interface section.

11. HDD (option): A 3.5" HDD (20.5 GB) can be connected using the IDEinterface. The hard disk is partitioned as shown below. The sizes cannot beadjusted.

Partition Size Function CommentFile System 1

500 MBDownloaded fonts, forms. Remain stored even after

cycling power off/on.Image TMP

9800 MBCollation, sample print,locked print.

Commonly used area forapplications, erased afterpower off.

Job Log10 MB

Job log. Remains stored even aftercycling power off/on.

The system and application software for the following boards can be downloadedfrom the Controller IC Card.

• Controller (Flash ROM and flash ROM DIMM)• BCU (Main CPU and MUSIC CPU)

For details about downloading software from an IC card, see Service Tables –Firmware Update Procedure.


6-65

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.10.2 BOARD LAYOUT

ASIC(COMIC)

CPU

Flash ROM

DIPSW

NetworkI/F

ICCARD

I/F

SRAM DIMM I/F x 2

ROM DIMM I/F x 3

NVRAM

IDE I/F (HDD)

NVRAMI/F

HDDPower

Supply I/F

PCI Option I/F(IEEE1394)

OptionBoard I/F

EngineI/F

IEEE1284I/F

LED

G060D552.WMF


6-66

6.10.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING

RPCS Driver

PCL5c Driver

RCM profile

GrayCorrection

γ γ γ γ Correction

8 bitCMYK

CorrectedRGB

Toner Limitation

Dithering & ROP

Matching

RPCS Driver

ControllerHost

ICM Engine/ICM profile

PrinterEngine

CMYK8 bit

CMYK

8 bit K

UCR/BG

RGB

CMYK1 bit

RGB

G060D562.WMF

PCL Driver Decode&

Scale8 bit

ColorMatching

Dithering &

ROP

•••• BG/UCR,• • • • Gray Correction• • • • Toner Limitation

RGB

RGB RGB8bit

RGB 8 bit

CMY8bit

CMYK1 bit

CMY1bit

ControllerHost PrinterEngine

ICM Engine/ICM profile

(Matching by Host)

RGB ➔➔➔➔ CMY Correction

CMY8bit

G060D563.WMF


6-67

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

PS3 Driver

CMS (Color Management System)

CMS optimizes the color print quality using a color profile that is based on thecharacteristics of the printer. With RPCS, the color profile is applied by the driver.With PS3 and PCL5c, the color profile is applied in the matching/CRD module onthe controller except when using CMM/ICC/ICM profiles.

CMS is not used when the color profile setting in the printer driver is set to “Off.”

Gray Correction

Gray correction processes gray with K or CMYK toner depending on the driversettings.

BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)

The RGB data is converted to CMYK data with BG/UCR. During CMYK conversion,some CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm.

Gamma Correction

The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). ForCMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data isstored in NVRAM.

PS Driver

CIEto

XYZ

ColorMatching

RGB

XYZ

CIE ABCCMYK 8 bit

CMM/ICC/ICMProfile

FineFine Super

BG/UCR(RGB

Correction)

RGBto

XYZCMYK8 bit

XYZ

Gam

ma

Gra

y C

orr

ecti

on

To

ner

Lim

itat

ion

Dit

her

an

d R

IP

CMYK CMYK CMYKCMYK1 bit

VividSuper VividNone

CRD

G060D564.WMF


6-68

Toner Limitation

Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.

Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They canbe adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).

• Default: 190% for text, 260% for photo• Adjustable range: 100% to 400%

Dither Processing and ROP/RIP

Dither patterns have been prepared for photo and text independently. Ditheringconverts the 8-bit data to 1-bit data. However, these dither patterns create theillusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern isselected depending on the selected resolution.

RIP: Raster Image ProcessingROP: Raster Operation


6-69

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.10.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

Sample Print

This feature was formerly known as “Proof Print”. It requires installing an optionalHDD. This function gives users a chance to check the print results before starting amultiple-set print run.

• The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 5.8 GB. Thispartition is also used by the collation and locked print features.

• The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using locked print.• The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding jobs stored

using locked print.• The maximum number of pages is 2,000, including jobs using locked print and

collation.

Locked Print

This feature requires installing an optional HDD. Using this feature, the print job isstored in the machine but will not be printed until the user inputs an ID at themachine’s operation panel. This ID must match the ID that was input with theprinter driver.

• Stored data is automatically deleted after it is printed.• Stored data can be manually deleted at the operation panel.• The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using sample print.• The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding logs stored

using locked print.• The maximum number of pages is 2,000, including jobs using sample print and

collation.• Locked print uses the same hard disk partition as sample print and collation,

which is 5.8 GB.


6-70

Paper Source Selection

Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)

The “Tray Priority” setting determinesthe start of the tray search when theuser selects “Auto Tray Select” withthe driver. The machine searches fora paper tray with the specified papersize and type.

When no tray contains paper thatmatches the paper size and typespecified by the driver, the controllerstops printing until the user loads thecorrect paper.

The “Tray Priority” setting can bespecified in the “Paper Input” menu.(Menu/ Paper Input/ Tray Priority)

NOTE: The by-pass feed table is notpart of the tray search.

Tray Lock

If “Tray Lock” is enabled for a tray, the controller skips the “locked” tray in the traysearch process.

The “Tray Lock” setting can be specified in the “Paper Input” menu.(Menu/ Paper Input/ Tray Lock)

NOTE: The by-pass feed table cannot be unlocked (Tray Lock is always enabled).

Manual Tray Select

If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver,the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper.

Priority Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

LCT (Optional)

Tray 3 (Optional)

Start of Tray Search

Tray 4 (Optional)

G060D555.WMF


6-71

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

Auto Continue

Overview

When this function is enabled, the machine waits for a specified period (0, 1, 5, 10,15 minutes) for the correct paper size and type to be set in the tray. If the timerruns out, the machine starts printing, even if there is no paper tray which matchesthe paper size and paper type specified by the driver.The machine searches for a paper tray in the following way.

• The interval can be set with the “System” menu in the User Tools.(Menu/ System/ Auto Continue)

NOTE: The default setting for this feature is ‘disabled’.

Auto Tray Select

When there is no paper tray thatmatches the paper size and typespecified by the driver, the machinesearches for any tray that has paper,and prints from the first tray it finds.The start of the tray search is thetray selected as the “Priority Tray.”

Manual Tray Select

The machine prints from the selected tray even if the paper size and type do notmatch the setting specified from the driver.

If “Auto Continue” is disabled, the machine waits until the user loads the correctpaper in the tray.

Priority Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

LCT (Optional)

Tray 3 (Optional)

Start of Tray Search

Tray 4 (Optional)

G060D555.WMF


6-72

Paper Output Tray

The output tray can be selected with the “Output Tray” setting in the “System”menu (Menu/ System/ Output Tray).

If a print job does not specify an output tray or if the driver specifies the default tray,the output tray selected with this user tool will be used.

Output Tray Selected

• If the machine cannot print to the selected output tray, it prints to the defaultpaper output tray.

• If paper overflow is detected at the selected output tray, the controller stopsprinting until the overflow detector goes off.

Sequential Stacking

When the 4-bin mailbox is installed, “AutoTray SW” is selected as the output tray inthe “System” menu, and “Printer Default” isspecified as the output tray in the driver,the machine automatically sends the outputto the lowest tray. When that tray fills up,the machine sends the output to the nextlowest tray. When that tray also fills up, themachine sends the output to the nextlowest tray sequentially.This feature is called “Sequential Stacking.”

• If a tray becomes full and paper isdetected in the next tray, the machinedisplays an error and stops printing.When paper in the next tray is removed,the machine automatically resumesprinting to the next tray.

• If alltrays become full (overflow detected in alltrays), the machine displays an error andstops printing. This time, all paper in alltrays must be removed.

Internal Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

Tray 3

Tray 4

G060D556.WMF


6-73

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

Stapling

Stapling is available when the two-tray finisher is installed.The finisher has the following stapling positions.

• Depending on the paper orientation, the image may have to be rotated. Thecontroller rotates the image. If the paper cannot be physically stapled asspecified by the driver, it will not be stapled.

• There is a limit for the number of sheets which can be stapled. If a job has morethan this number, it will not be stapled.For A3, 11” x 17”, 8½” x 14” paper: 30 sheetsFor 8½” x 11”, A4, B5 paper: 50 sheets

Punching

Punching is available only when the punch kit is installed with the two-tray finisher.The number of holes (2, 3, or 4 holes) depends on the type of punch kit.

• There is only one punch position available, so the relationship between thepunching position and the printed image depends on the paper feed orientationand image rotation.

Paper Feed Direction(Printed side)

Stapled 2 places

2 Tray Finisher

G060D557.WMF

Paper Feed Direction(Printed side)

2 Tray Finisher

Punching Position

G060D558.WMF


The driver rotates the image

IEEE1394 INTERFACE 23 February, 2001

6-74

6.11 IEEE1394 INTERFACE

6.11.1 SPECIFICATIONS

Hardware SpecificationInterface: IEEE1394 (6 pins)

(no power supply, cable power repeated, IEEE1394a-2000 compliant)Ports: 2 portsData rates: 400Mbps/200Mbps/100Mbps

System RequirementsPC: Windows PC with IEEE1394 portOS: Microsoft Windows 2000 upgraded with service pack 1Cable length: 4.5m (15ft)

6.11.2 IEEE1394

IEEE1394, also known as FireWire (a name patented by Apple), is an easy-to-usepeer-to-peer networking technology allowing speeds of up to 400 Mbps.

The current standard contains the following features, which are supported in mostdevices:

• Hot swapping (cables can be connected and disconnected while thecomputer and other devices are switched on)

• Peer-to-peer networking (no hub required)• No terminator or device ID is required, unlike SCSI• Automatic configuration of devices upon start-up, or “plug and play.”• Real-time data transfer at 100, 200, and 400 Mbps• Common connectors for different devices

The cable length is limited to 4.5 m (15ft). However, up to 16 cables and 63devices can be connected to an IEEE1394 network.

IEEE1394 cables can be either 4-pin (data only) or 6-pin (data and power).IEEE1394 allows either 6-pin or 4-pin connectors. However, this machine only usesthe 6-pin connectors. The machine has two 6-pin ports.

IEEE1394 Board

IEEE1394 I/F

IEEE1394 I/F

G060D559.WMF

23 February, 2001 IEEE1394 INTERFACE

6-75

De

tail

ed

De

sc

rip

tio

ns

6.11.3 BLOCK DIAGRAM

• PHY: Physical layer control device• Link: Link layer control device• EEPROM: 256-byte ROM

6.11.4 PIN ASSIGNMENT

PinNo.

Signal Description

1 Cable Power2 GND3 Receive strobe4 Transmit data5 Receive data6 Transmit strobe

IEEE1394 Board

1394 I/F

1394 I/F

PHYTSB41AB2

ClockOscillator

LinkTSB12LV23A

EEPROM

Op

tio

n I/

F (

CN

4)

PC Controller

G060D560.WMF

Pin 1

Pin 6

G060D561.WMF

Pin assignmentPin 1 Pin 4Pin 2 Pin 3Pin 5 Pin 6

IEEE1394 INTERFACE 23 February, 2001

6-76

6.11.5 REMARKS ABOUT THIS INTERFACE KIT

Note the following points about this unit.

• The machine does not print reports specifically for IEEE1394. Just print theConfiguration Page at installation to check that the machine recognizes the card.

• There is no spooler or print queue. If a computer tries to print over the IEEE1394while the printer is busy, the IEEE1394 interface card inside the printer will returna busy signal.

• After starting a job using IEEE1394, do not switch the printer off until the job hasbeen completed. Even though the printer may appear to be dead, it may be inthe middle of an IEEE1394 protocol exchange with the computer.

• When using IEEE1394, it is not possible to check the printer status from thecomputer with a utility such as Printer Manager for Client.

6.11.6 TROUBLESHOOTING NOTES

If there are problems printing using the IEEE1394 interface, check the following.

• Is the computer using Windows 2000 with service pack 1?• Has the interface card been replaced recently? Each card has an individual

address, similar to the MAC address in an Ethernet card. If the card waschanged, the driver cannot find the old card. The new card is another device anda new printer appears in Windows Control panel, and this must be configured inthe same way as the printer that was replaced (the old printer icon in WindowsControl Panel should be deleted) has to be reconfigured.

• Is there a loop somewhere in the network? An IEEE1394 network must be achain or a branched chain. There can be no loops.

• Try to find out where in the chain the problem is occurring. Test the machineone-to-one with the computer to determine if the printer is defective (when theprinter’s interface cable is plugged in, the computer should see ‘Printer Ready’;when the cable is disconnected, the computer should see ‘Offline’).

23 February, 2001 SPECIFICATIONS

SPEC-1

Sp

ec.

SPECIFICATIONS

1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Configuration: Desktop

Print Process: Dry electrostatic transfer system

Printer Languages: PCL5cAdobe PostScript 3RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)

Resolution: PCL5c:600 x 600 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi

Adobe PostScript 3:1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi

RPCS:1200 x 1200 dpi, 1200 x 600 dpi, 600 x 600 dpi

Gradation 1 bit/pixel

Printing speed:

Resolution Plain paper Thick/OHP600 x 600 dpi 38 ppm 10 ppm

1200 x 600 dpi 38 ppm 10 ppmMonochrome

1200 x 1200 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppm

1200 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 10 ppmColor

1200 x 1200 dpi 14 ppm 10 ppm

Resident Fonts: PCL5c:35 Intelli fonts10 TrueType fonts1 bitmap font

Adobe PostScript 3:136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)

Host Interfaces: Bi-directional IEEE1284 parallel x 1: StandardEthernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): StandardIEEE1394: Optional

Network Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, AppleTalk

First Print Speed: Color: 9 seconds or less (from tray 1)Monochrome: 7 seconds or less (from tray 1)

Warm-up Time Less than 120 seconds (at 23°C/50%)

Print PaperCapacity:

Standard tray: 500 sheets x 2By-pass tray: 100 sheetsOptional paper feed tray: 500 sheets x 1, 500 sheets x 2,Optional LCT: 2000 sheets

SPECIFICATIONS 23 February, 2001

SPEC-2

Print Paper Size: (Refer to “Supported Paper Sizes”.)

Minimum MaximumTray 1 A4/8½" x 11" (LEF)Tray 2 A5 (LEF)/8½" x 11" A3/11" x 17"

By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 458 mm/12” x 18”Optional Tray A5 (LEF)/8½" x 11" A3/11" x 17"

LCT A4/8½" x 11" (LEF)

Printing PaperWeight:

Standard tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)Optional paper tray: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)By-pass tray: 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb.)

Output PaperCapacity:

Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down)External exit tray: 100 sheets (face up)

Memory: Standard 32 MB, up to 384 MB with optional DIMM

Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A (for North America)220 V - 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 6.0 A (for Europe)

Power Consumption:

120V 230VMaximum 1200 W or less 1300 W or less

Energy Saver 45 W or less 45 W or less

Noise Emission:

(Sound Power Level)

Mainframe Only Full SystemPrinting 68 dB or less 72 dB or less

Stand-by 42 dB or lessLow power mode 40 dB or less

NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricohstandard methodology.

Dimensions (W x D x H): 578 x 648 x 715 mm (22.7” x 25.6” x 28.2”)

Weight: Less than 77 kg (170 lb.)


SPEC-3

Sp

ec.

1.1 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

1.1.1 PAPER FEED

North America Europe/AsiaPaper Size (W x L)

Tray 1Tray2/3/4

LCT Tray 1Tray2/3/4

LCTBy-pass

Tray

A3 W 12“ x 18” N N N N N N Y#

A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm N Y N N Y N Y#

A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm N Y#/Y* N N Y N Y#

A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y* Y Y* Y Y Y Y#

A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm N N N N N N Y#

A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm N Y N N Y N Y#

A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm N N N N N N Y#

B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm N Y#/Y* N N Y N Y#

B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm N Y#/Y* N N Y#/Y* N Y#

B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm N Y N N Y N Y#

B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm N N N N N N Y#

Ledger 11 x 17” N Y N N Y N Y#

Letter SEF 8.5 x 11” N Y N N Y#/Y* N Y#

Letter LEF 11 x 8.5” Y Y Y Y* Y Y* Y#

Legal SEF 8.5 x 14“ N Y N N Y#/Y* N Y#

Half Letter SEF 5.5 x 8.5” N N N N N N Y#

Executive SEF 7.25 x 10.5” N Y# N N Y# N Y#

Executive LEF 10.5 x 7.25” N N N N N N Y#

F SEF 8 x 13” N Y# N N Y# N Y#

Foolscap SEF 8.5 x 13” N Y# N N Y# N Y#

Folio SEF 8.25 x 13” N Y# N N Y# N Y#

8K 267 x 390 mm N Y# N N Y# N Y#

16K SEF 195 x 267 mm N Y# N N Y# N Y#

16K LEF 267 x 195 mm N Y# N N Y# N Y#

Custom Minimum:90 x 148 mmMaximum:305 x 458 mm

N N N N N N Y#

Com10 Env. 4.125 x 9.5” N N N N N N Y#

Monarch Env. 3.875 x 7.5” N N N N N N Y#

C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm N N N N N N Y#

C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm N N N N N N Y#

DL Env. 110 x 220 mm N N N N N N Y#

Remarks:

Y Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.Y# Supported: the user specifies the paper size.Y* Supported: depends on a technician adjustmentN Not supported


SPEC-4

1.1.2 PAPER EXIT

Paper Size (W x L)Internal Tray(Face Down)

External Tray(Face Up)

Finisher4-bin

MailboxDuplex

A3 W 12“ x 18” N Y N N NA3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y YA4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y YA4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y YA5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y N Y NA5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y Y Y YA6 SEF 105 x 148 mm Y Y N N NB4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y Y Y YB5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y YB5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y Y Y YB6 SEF 128 x 182 mm Y Y N N NLedger 11 x 17” Y Y Y Y YLetter SEF 8.5 x 11” Y Y Y Y YLetter LEF 11 x 8.5” Y Y Y Y YLegal SEF 8.5 x 14“ Y Y Y Y YHalf Letter SEF 5.5 x 8.5” Y Y N Y NExecutive SEF 7.25 x 10.5” Y Y Y Y YExecutive LEF 10.5 x 7.25” Y Y N N NF SEF 8 x 13” Y Y Y Y YFoolscap SEF 8.5 x 13” Y Y Y N YFolio SEF 8.25 x 13” Y Y Y N Y8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y N Y16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y Y Y16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y Y YCustom Minimum:

90 x 148 mmMaximum:305 x 458 mm

Y Y N Y N

Com10 Env. 4.125 x 9.5” N Y N N NMonarch Env. 3.875 x 7.5” N Y N N NC6 Env. 114 x 162 mm N Y N N NC5 Env. 162 x 229 mm N Y N N NDL Env. 110 x 220 mm N Y N N N

Remarks:

Y SupportedN Not supported


SPEC-5

Sp

ec.

2. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES

The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-runinstaller allows you to select which components to install.

2.1 PRINTER DRIVERS

Printer LanguageWindows95/98/ME

Windows NT4.0 Windows 2000 Macintosh

PCL 5c Yes Yes Yes NoPS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes

RPCS Yes Yes Yes No

NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC,Alpha, or MIPS platforms.

2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows2000, which uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for each operating system isprovided with the driver.

3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 7.6 or later versions.

2.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE

Software DescriptionAgfa Font Manager 2000(Win95/98, 2000, NT4)

A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer.

SmartNetMonitor for Admin(Win95/98, 2000, NT4)

A printer management utility for network administrators. NIBsetup utilities are also available.

SmartNetMonitor for Client(Win95/98, 2000, NT4)

• A printer management utility for client users.• A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IP

network.• A peer to peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. This

provides the parallel printing and recovery printing features.Printer Utility for Mac(Mac)

This software provides several convenient functions for printingfrom Macintosh clients.

IEEE1394 Utility(Win2000)

This utility solves problems with Windows 2000.

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite(Win95/98, 2000, NT4)

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal documentmanagement software and can manage both image dataconverted from paper documents and application files saved ineach client’s PC.


SPEC-6

3. MACHINE CONFIGURATION

ItemMachine

CodeNo. Remarks

Main Unit G060 AOptions

Finisher G565 B

Requires the HDD or 128MB DIMMmemory, duplex unit and one of thethree paper feed options.Finisher and mailbox cannot both beinstalled.

Four-bin Mailbox G566 CFinisher and mailbox cannot both beinstalled.

Paper Feed Unit (500 x 1) G567 DPaper Feed Unit (500 x 2) G568 ELCT G569 F

Install any one of these three units.

Duplex Unit G571 GPunch Unit B377 Requires the finisherInternal Options64MB DIMM Memory G579128MB DIMM Memory G580256MB DIMM Memory G581NVRAM Memory G311IEEE1394 I/F Board G590 At least 64 MB of DIMM is required

HDD Type 1 G308

Others

G060V112.JPG

[A][B]

[C]

[F]

[G][G]

[E] [D]


SPEC-7

Sp

ec.

ItemMachine

CodeNo. Remarks

Maintenance Kit A G763 Includes CMY PCUs.Maintenance Kit B G764 Includes CMY development units.Maintenance Kit C G765 Includes the fusing unit.Maintenance Kit D

G766Includes K development unit and dustfilter.

Maintenance Kit E G767 Includes the used toner bottle.Maintenance Kit F G773 Includes the K PCU.Maintenance Kit G G774 Includes the fusing oil supply unit.Maintenance Kit H

TBAIncludes the feed roller, pick-up roller,and separation roller.

NOTE: All the above items are user installable except for the punch unit.


SPEC-8

4. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

4.1 500-SHEET TRAY

Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)Minimum: A5 (LEF)/8½" x 11"

Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)

Paper Feed System: FRR system

Paper Height Detection: 3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)

Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main unit)

Power Consumption: 50 W


Weight 18 kg (39.7 lb.)

4.2 1000-SHEET TRAY

Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)Minimum: A5 (LEF)/8½" x 11"


Tray Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)


Paper Height Detection: 3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)





4.3 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

Paper Size: A4/8½" x 11" (LEF)


Tray Capacity: 2000 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)


Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near End)




SPEC-9

Sp

ec.



4.4 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT

Print Paper Size: No punch mode:A3/11" x 17" to A5 (LEF)/8½" x 11"

Punch mode:2 holes: A3/11" x 17" to A4/8½" x 11" (SEF) A4/8½" x 11" to A5 (LEF)3 holes: A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) A4, B5, 8½" x 11" (LEF)4 holes (Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) A4, B5, 8½" x 11" (LEF)4 holes (North Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) A4, B5, 8½" x 11" (LEF)

Staple mode:A3/11" x 17" to B5/8½" x 11"

Paper Weight: No punch mode:60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Punch mode:60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Staple mode:64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 23 lb.)Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled

Tray Capacity: Upper tray:500 sheets: A4, 8½" x 11" , B5, A5 (LEF)250 sheets: 11” x 17", A3, 8½" x 14", B4

Lower tray (default mode – stapled output only goes totray 2):

2000 sheets: A4, 8½" x 11" (LEF)750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 8½" x 14", 11” x 17”, 8½" x 11" (SEF)500 sheets: A5 (LEF)

Lower tray (multi-tray staple mode – stapled output cango to either tray):

1500 sheets: A4, 8½" x 11" (LEF)750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 8½" x 14", 11” x 17”, 8½" x 11" (SEF)500 sheets: A5 (LEF)

Staple capacity: Single size:50 sheets: A4, 8½" x 11" , B530 sheets: A3, B4, 8½" x 14", 11” x 17”

Mixed size:30 sheets: A4 (LEF) & A3, B5 (LEF) & B4, 8½" x 11" (LEF) & 11” x 17”


SPEC-10

Staple position: 7 positions1-staple: 4 positions (Top Left, Top Right,

Top Left-Oblique, Top Right-Oblique)2-staples: 3 positions (Left, Top, Right)

Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)

Power consumption: 48 W


Without punchunit:

53 kg (116.9 lb.)Weight

With punch unit: 55 Kg (121.3 lb.)

4.5 FOUR-BIN MAILBOX

Number of bins 4 bins

Stack Capacity: 125 sheets x 4 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)

Paper Size for Trays: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)Minimum: A5 (LEF)/8½" x 11"

Print Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)



Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 400 mm (21.3” x 23.6” x 15.8”)(when installed in the machine)


A B C D E F G H I J

A B C D E F G H I J

CN222 (BCU-P) CN223 (BCU-P) CN224 (BCU-P)CN221 (BCU-P) CN225 (BCU-P)

1 GND

2 +5VLD

3 +5VLD

4 GND

5 +5V

6 +5V

7 +5V

8 +5V

9 GND

10 +3.3V_LDB

11 XLD2SYNC

12 XDP2SYNC

13 XP2FGATE

14 GND

15 PCLK

16 GND

17 XP2LGATE

18 GND

19 XP2DT0

20 GND

21 XP2DT1

22 GND

23 XP2DT2

24 GND

25 XP2DT3

26 GND

27 XP2DT4

28 GND

29 XP2DT5

30 GND

31 XP2DT6

32 GND

33 XP2DT7

34 GND

35 GAVD RST1

36 GND

37 SCL1

38 GND

39 SDA1

40 GND

41 XPFGATE C

42 GND

43 REFCLK

44 IICAD2 C

45 N.C.

46 IICAD1 C

47 XSCRDY

48 N.C.

49 GND

20 GND

1 GND

2 +5VLD

3 +5VLD

4 GND

5 +5V

6 +5V

7 +5V

8 +5V

9 GND

10 +3.3V_LDB

11 XLD1SYNC

12 XDP1SYNC

13 XP1FGATE

14 GND

15 PCLK

16 GND

17 XP1LGATE

18 GND

19 XP1DT0

20 GND

21 XP1DT1

22 GND

23 XP1DT2

24 GND

25 XP1DT3

26 GND

27 XP1DT4

28 GND

29 XP1DT5

30 GND

31 XP1DT6

32 GND

33 XP1DT7

34 GND

35 GAVD RST0

36 GND

37 SCL1

38 GND

39 SDA1

40 GND

41 XPFGATE M

42 GND

43 REFCLK

44 IICAD2 M

45 N.C.

46 IICAD1 M

47 XSCRDY

48 N.C.

49 GND

50 GND

1 GND

2 +5VLD

3 +5VLD

4 GND

5 +5V

6 +5V

7 +5V

8 +5V

9 GND

10 +3.3V_LDB

11 XLD4SYNC

12 XDP4SYNC

13 XP4FGATE

14 GND

15 PCLK

16 GND

17 XP4LGATE

18 GND

19 XP4DT0

20 GND

21 XP4DT1

22 GND

23 XP4DT2

24 GND

25 XP4DT3

26 GND

27 XP4DT4

28 GND

29 XP4DT5

30 GND

31 XP4DT6

32 GND

33 XP4DT7

34 GND

35 GAVD RST3

36 GND

37 SCL0

38 GND

39 SDA0

40 GND

41 XPFGATE K

42 GND

43 REFCLK

44 IICAD2 K

45 N.C.

46 IICAD1 K

47 XSCRDY

48 N.C.

49 GND

50 GND

1 GND

2 +5VLD

3 +5VLD

4 GND

5 +5V

6 +5V

7 +5V

8 +5V

9 GND

10 +3.3V_LDB

11 XLD3SYNC

12 XDP3SYNC

13 XP3FGATE

14 GND

15 PCLK

16 GND

17 XP3LGATE

18 GND

19 XP3DT0

20 GND

21 XP3DT1

22 GND

23 XP3DT2

24 GND

25 XP3DT3

26 GND

27 XP3DT4

28 GND

29 XP3DT5

30 GND

31 XP3DT6

32 GND

33 XP3DT7

34 GND

35 GAVD RST2

36 GND

37 SCL0

38 GND

39 SDA0

40 GND

41 XPFGATE Y

42 GND

43 REFCLK

44 IICAD2 Y

45 N.C.

46 IICAD1 Y

47 XSCRDY

48 N.C.

49 GND

50 GND

1 +12V

2 GND

3 +12V

4 GND

5 +12V

6 GND

7 XIPU4DT1

8 XIPU4DT3

9 XIPU4DT5

10 XIPU4DT7

11 GND

12 XIPU4LGT

13 XIPU4LSYC

14 XWR4SYNC

15 GND

16 GND

17 XIPU3DT1

18 XIPU3DT3

19 XIPU3DT5

20 XIPU3DT7

21 GND

22 XIPU3LGT

23 XIPU3LSYC

24 XWR3SYNC

25 GND

26 XIPU2DT1

27 XIPU2DT3

28 XIPU2DT5

29 XIPU2DT7

30 GND

31 XIPU2LGT

32 XIPU2LSYC

33 XWR2SYNC

34 GND

35 XIPU1DT1

36 XIPU1DT3

37 XIPU1DT5

38 XIPU1DT7

39 GND

40 XIPU1LGT

41 XIPU1LSYC

42 XWR1SYNC

43 RXD_IPU_1

44 GND

45 OPSW1

46 OPSW3

47 OPSW5

48 OPSW7

49 RESERVE

50 N.C.

51 +5V

52 GND

53 +24V

54 GND

55 +24V

56 GND

57 XIPU4DT0

58 XIPU4DT2

59 XIPU4DT4

60 XIPU4DT6

61 GND

62 IPUCLK

63 GND

64 XIPU4FGT

65 XF4SYNC

66 GND

67 XIPU3DT0

68 XIPU3DT2

69 XIPU3DT4

70 XIPU3DT6

71 GND

72 GND

73 XIPU3FGT

74 XF3SYNC

75 GND

76 XIPU2DT0

77 XIPU2DT2

78 XIPU2DT4

79 XIPU2DT6

80 GND

81 GND

82 XIPU2FGT

83 XF2SYNC

84 GND

85 XIPU1DT0

86 XIPU1DT2

87 XIPU1DT4

88 XIPU1DT6

89 GND

90 GND

91 XIPU1FGT

92 XF1SYNC

93 TXD_IPU_0

94 GND

95 OPSW0

96 OPSW2

97 OPSW4

98 OPSW6

99 RESERVE

100 N.C.

101 GND

102 PWCTRP

103 OPPLED1

104 OPPLED3

105 OPPRS

106 N.C.

107 OPPD1

108 OPPD3

109 GND

110 GND

111 AD1

112 AD3

113 AD5

114 AD7

115 GND

116 CBE0

117 AD9

118 AD11

119 AD13

120 AD15

121 GND

122 CBE1

123 XSERR

124 XSTOP

125 XTRDY

126 XFRAME

127 GND

128 CBE2

129 AD17

130 AD19

131 AD21

132 AD23

133 GND

134 CBE3

135 AD25

136 AD27

137 AD29

138 AD31

139 N.C.

140 N.C.

141 XRST

142 GND

143 PCICLK

144 GND

145 +5VE

146 GND

147 +5VE

148 GND

149 +5VE

150 +5VE

151 N.C.

152 XENGRDY

153 OPPLED0

154 OPPLED2

155 OPPRW

156 OPPE

157 OPPD0

158 OPPD2

159 GND

160 GND

161 AD0

162 AD2

163 AD4

164 AD6

165 GND

166 GND

167 AD8

168 AD10

169 AD12

170 AD14

171 GND

172 GND

173 PAR

174 XPERR

175 XDEVSEL

176 XIRDY

177 GND

178 GND

179 AD16

180 AD18

181 AD20

182 AD22

183 GND

184 GND

185 AD24

186 AD26

187 AD28

188 AD30

189 N.C.

190 XREQ

191 XGNT

192 XINT

193 GND

194 GND

195 +5VE

196 GND

197 +5VE

198 GND

199 +5VE

200 +5VE

CN

22

0-A

1-A

2-A

3-A

4-A

5-A

6-A

7-A

8-A

9-A

10

-A1

1-A

12

-A1

3-A

14

-A1

5-A

16

-A1

7-B

1-B

2-B

3-B

4-B

5-B

6-B

7-B

8-B

9-B

10

-B1

1-B

12

-B1

3-B

14

-B1

5-B

16

-B1

7

M3

SOL1

M16

M17

M2M3M4M5M1

M1M2

SOL7

SOL6

CN101-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12-13-14-15

CN350-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

-10-11-12-13-14-15

[0] PGND[24] +24V[0] GND[12] +12V[0] GND[0] GND[0] GND[5] +5V[5] +5V[5] +5VLDW[0] GND[0] GND[5] +5VE[5] +5VE[5] +5VE

CN102-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10

CN351-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

-10

CN103-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

CN360-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

CN219-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

-10-11-12-13-14-15-16

CN358-9-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN357-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

[!24] +24VS2_T[0] GND[24] +24V[24] +24V[0] PGND[0] PGND[12] +12V[0] GND[0] GND[5] +5V

[!24] +24VS1[!24] +24VS3[!24] +24VS2[!24] +24VS2[0] PGND[0] PGND[0] PGND[0] PGND[5] +5V

RxD [Duplex] → ➀GND

RXD [Duplex] → ➁TXD [Mail Box]RXD [Mail Box][0] GND (Finisher)TXD (Finisher)[0] GND (Finisher)RXD(Finisher)

[$5] Enagy SaveZero Cross[!24] Fusing Relay[$24] Heating Roller Fusing Lamp ON[$24] Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp ON[$5] Front Door Close[$5] Vertical Transport Cover Close

* Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp N* Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp L* Heating Roller Fusing Lamp N* Heating Roller Fusing Lamp L

[24] +24VS1[24] +24VS1[0] PGND[0] PGND[5] +5VLD[0] GND[5 → 0/5] Duplex Motor-A

[5 → 0/5] Duplex Motor:-A[5 → 0/5] Duplex Motor B[5 → 0/5] Duplex Motor:-B[$5] Duplex Feed Sensor[$5] Unit Set[H: Low L: High] Motor Speed

GNDGND+5V+5VTxD

RxD

+24V+24V+24V+24VGNDGNDGNDGND

+2

4V

S2

[24

]P

GN

D [0

]

AC

L-O

N *

AC

-N-O

N *

AC

-L *

AC

-N *

+2

4V

S1

[24

]+

24

VS

2 [!

24]

CN

22

5

CN

1

11

200200

120V Machine 230/240V Machine[120] L [230] L[120] N [230] N

N.C

.N

.C.

[24

] +2

4V

[0] P

GN

D[$

5] S

tart

[$5

] Lo

ck

CL

OC

K[1

2 →

0/1

2] -A

[12

→ 0

/12

] -B[1

2] +

12

V[1

2 →

0/1

2] B

[12

→ 0

/12

] A[1

2 →

0/1

2] -A

[12

→ 0

/12

] -B[1

2] +

12

V[1

2 →

0/1

2] B

[12

→ 0

/12

] A[1

2 →

0/1

2] -A

[12

→ 0

/12

] -B[1

2] +

12

V[1

2 →

0/1

2] B

[12

→ 0

/12

] A[1

2 →

0/1

2] -A

[12

→ 0

/12

] -B[1

2] +

12

V[1

2 →

0/1

2] B

[12

→ 0

/12

] A[0

] GN

D[!

5]

[5] +

5V

Te

mp

era

ture

: 1[0

] GN

DT

em

pe

ratu

re: 2

[0] G

ND

PW

M: K

PW

M: Y

PW

M: C

PW

M: M

PW

M: P

ap

er

[$5] T

RG

: Cle

an

ing

[$5] T

RG

: Pa

pe

r[$

5] S

C[0

] GN

D

PD

Co

ntro

l: 2O

UT

: 2P

D C

on

trol: 1

[5] +

5V

OU

T: 1

[0] G

ND

[12

] +1

2V

[0] P

GN

D2

[24

]+2

4V

S2

-T

GN

DF

B: C

ha

rge

: I: MF

B: C

ha

rge

: I: CF

B: C

ha

rge

: I: YF

B: C

ha

rge

: I: KV

: Ch

arg

e: A

C: M

V: C

ha

rge

: AC

: CV

: Ch

arg

e: A

C: Y

V: C

ha

rge

: AC

: K

CN

21

3-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

-14

-15

-16

-17

-18

54321543215432154321543213212121

98765432110

987654321

CN

22

8-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

CN

37

9-9-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN873CN877CN876CN875CN878CN879441442

442 441

Polyg

on M

irror M

oto

r

3rd

Mirro

r Po

sition

Mo

tor-C

LD

H.P

Sen

sor

3rd

Mirro

r Po

sition

Mo

tor-Y

3rd

Mirro

r Po

sition

Mo

tor-M

Therm

istor 1

Therm

istor 2

LD

Po

sition

ing

Mo

tor

CN

20

4-A

1-A

2-A

3-A

4-A

5-A

6-A

7

-A8

-A9

-A1

0-A

11

-A1

2-A

13

-A1

4-A

15

-A1

6-A

17

-A1

8

CN

38

1-7-6-5-4-3-2-1C

N38

2-1

1-1

0-9-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

-B1

-B2

-B3

-B4

-B5

-B6

-B7

-B8

-B9

-B1

0-B

11

-B1

2-B

13

-B1

4-B

15

-B1

6

-B1

7

-B1

8

-B1

-B2

-B3

-B4

-B5

-B6

-B7

-B8

-B9

-B1

0-B

11

-B1

2-B

13

-B1

4-B

15

CN

21

0-A

1-A

2-A

3-A

4-A

5-A

6-A

7-A

8-A

9-A

10

-A1

1-A

12

-A1

3

-A1

4

-A1

5

76543217654321765432121213212132132132132143214321

CN921 CN834 CN833 CN832 CN941 CN830 801 CN800 939 940

939 940CN941CN833

Exit Ju

nctio

n G

ate

So

len

oid

Fusin

g F

an M

oto

r

Paper E

xit Se

nso

r

Fusin

g E

xit Se

nso

r

Le

ft Do

or S

witch

Paper O

verflo

w S

en

sor

PS

U C

oo

ling

Fa

n M

oto

r

7654321

7654321

Mem

ory C

hip

-M

Mem

ory C

hip

-C

Mem

ory C

hip

-Y

GN

DP

WM

: Bia

s: MP

WM

: Bia

s: CP

WM

: Bia

s: YP

WM

: Bia

s: K[0

or 5

] AC

: Ch

arg

e: O

N2

[0 o

r 5] A

C: C

ha

rge

: ON

1

PW

M: C

ha

rge

: MP

WM

: Ch

arg

e: C

PW

M: C

ha

rge

: YP

WM

: Ch

arg

e: K

[$5

] ON

: Ch

arg

e: K

[$5

] ON

: Ch

arg

e: C

MY

[$5

] ON

: Bia

s: K[$

5] O

N: B

ias: C

MY

N.C

.N

.C.

[$5

] SC

[0] G

ND

N.C

.[5

] +5

VID

N.C

.D

AT

AM

CC

LO

CK

[0] G

ND

N.C

.[5

] +5

VN

.C.

DA

TA

N.C

.C

LO

CK

[0] G

ND

[5] +

5V

DA

TA

CL

OC

K

[0] G

ND

Te

mp

era

ture

[24

] +2

4V

[$2

4]

[0] G

ND

[$5

][5

] +5

[$5

]G

ND

Clo

seG

ND

[$5

]+

5V[$

5] S

et O

il

[!5

] Ne

w O

il De

velo

pm

en

t

[0] G

ND

[0] G

ND

[$5

][5

] +5

V[2

4] +

24

V[!

5] L

oc

k[$

24

] TR

G[$

24

]N

.C.

N.C

.[2

4] +

24

VS

OL

N.C

.N

.C.

SO

L +

24

VN

.C.

CN359-4-3-2-1

1234

CN209-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

65432154321

65432154321

1212

12

1234

Thermostat

Heating Roller Fusing Lamp

Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp

New Unit Sensor

(Maintenance Kit)

555

555CN

55

4

551

551

552

552

CN

55

3

CN

82

9C

N91

1

Heating Roller Thermistor

Pressure Roller Thermistor

CN946

CN946

CN935 CN936 CN937

An

ti-con

de

nsa

tion

He

ate

r

Ma

in S

witch

Vertica

l Tra

nsp

ort S

witc

h

928

907

907

NC

35

6-1-2N

C36

2(C

N36

3)

-1-2NC

36

4-1-2-3-4N

C36

1-1-2

NC

38

0-1-2

-1-2

-1-2

CN355-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

-8-9-10-11-12-13

765432187654321

765432187654321

CN501-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

-8-9

-10-11-12-13

CN352-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12-13-14-15-16

CN511-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

-10-11-12-13-14-15-16

CN354-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12-13-14-15-16

CN363(CN362)-1-2-3

GN

D [0

][$

5]

+5V

[5]

GN

D [0

][$

5]

+5V

[5]

GN

D [0

][$

5]

+5V

[5]

CN502-1-2-3-4-5-6

CN503-1-2-3

+24VS1 [24]A [24 → 0/24]

-A [24 → 0/24]+24VS1 [24]

B [24 → 0/24]-B [24 → 0/24]

GND [0][▼5]

+5VLD [5]

231

CN

89

1

CN

51

5-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9C

N51

7-1-2-3C

N51

6-1-2C

N51

2-1-2-3-4C

N51

3-1-2-3-4-5-6C

N51

4-1-2-3-4-5-6

32132132143214321

GN

D [0

][$

5]

+5V

[5]

[$24]

+24IN

T [2

4]

+2

4V

SW

[!24]

+24IN

T-1

[24

]+

24

VS

W [!

24]

+24IN

T-2

[24

]

+24IN

T-2

[24

]A

[24

→ 0

/24

]-A

[24

→ 0

/24

]+

24INT

-2 [2

4]

B [2

4 →

0/2

4]

-B[2

4 →

0/2

4]

+24IN

T-2

[24

]A

[24

→ 0

/24

]-A

[24

→ 0

/24

]+

24INT

-2 [2

4]

B [2

4 →

0/2

4]

-B[2

4 →

0/2

4]

CN900CN902CN903CN901CN906890892

Exit S

enso

r 1

Exit S

enso

r 3

Duplex Inverter S

en

sor

Exit S

enso

r 2

Jun

ction

Ga

te S

ole

no

id

Duplex Inverter U

nit Sw

itch

Duple

x Door S

witch

Duplex Inverte

r Mo

tor 1

Duplex Inverte

r Mo

tor 2

Charg

e-K

Charg

e-Y

Charg

e-C

Charg

e-M

Bia

s-KB

ias-Y

Bia

s-CB

ias-M

T5

3T

55

T5

7T

61

T6

3T

65

T6

7

T5

0T

52

T5

4T

56

T6

0T

62

T6

4T

66

T5

1 T21T23T28T29

T20T21

Transfer-KTransfer-YPaperCleaning

Transfer-C

Transfer-M

CN840

CN905 CN904

CN905 CN904

CN

38

4-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

98765432110987654321

CN

41

1-1-2-3-4

CN

41

2-1-2-3

CN

41

0-1-2-3

CN

40

9-1-2-3-4

CN

40

7-1-2-3-4

CN

40

8-1-2-3

CN

40

6-1-2-3

CN

40

5-1-2-3-4

KY

: ST

AR

KY

: ST

AR

T: +

5V

Y: G

ND

KY

: ST

AR

T: G

ND

KY

: ST

AR

TY

: GN

DK

Y: E

ND

KY

: EN

DK

: GN

DK

Y: S

TA

RT

KY

: EN

DK

Y: E

ND

: +5

VK

: GN

DK

Y: E

ND

: GN

D

CM

: EN

DC

M: E

ND

: +5

VM

: GN

DC

M: E

ND

: GN

D

CM

: EN

DM

: GN

DC

M: S

TA

RT

CM

: ST

AR

TC

: GN

DC

M: E

ND

CM

: ST

AR

TC

M: S

TA

RT

: +5

VC

: GN

DC

M: S

TA

RT

: GN

D

C897

C897

C898

C898

Duplex Feed Motor

Duplex Feed Sensor

-1-2-1-2

IEEE1394Interface Board

(Option)

RAM 32MB(Standard)

Max: 384MB

RAM(Option)

HDD(Option)

NVRAM 64KB(Option)

Controller(PCB19)

PS

U T

em

pera

ture

Dete

ction

PSU(PCB16)

Duplex Inverter Unit(Option)

Duplex Control Baord(PCB1)

Duplex Drive Board(PCB2)

Duplex Feed Unit(Option)

High Voltage SupplyBoard-T, PA, CL

(PCB14)

Transfer Unit

S9

1

501

50

CN

22

4

CN

22

3

CN

22

2

CN

22

1

CN

40

4

CN

40

3

CN

40

2

CN

50

1

FF

C

FF

C

FF

C

FF

C

LD Unit-Y(PCB2)

1

501

501

501

50

LD Unit-K(PCB3)

LD Unit-M(PCB4)

LD Unit-C(PCB5)

CN

43

3-3-2-1

+5V

GN

D

LaserSynchronizing

DetectorBoard-KY-S

(PCB9)

LaserSynchronizing

DetectorBoard-KY-E

(PCB8)

LaserSynchronizing

DetectorBoard-MC-E

(PCB7)

LaserSynchronizing

DetectorBoard-MC-S

(PCB6)

Laser OpticsHousing Unit

CN

43

1-3-2-1

+5V

GN

D

CN

43

5-3-2-1

+5V

GN

D

CN

43

7-3-2-1

+5V

GN

D

High Voltage SupplyBoard-C, B(PCB17)

Fusing Unit

Thermofuse

BCU(PCB18)

FG

FG

[24] +24V Duplex[24] +24V Duplex[0] PGND Duplex[0] PGND Duplex[5] +5V Duplex[0] GND DuplexRXDTXD[0] GND[5 → 0/5] -A Duplex Motor[5 → 0/5] A Duplex Motor[5 → 0/5] -B Duplex Motor[5 → 0/5] B Duplex Motor[$5] Duplex Feed Sensor[$5] Unit Set[H: Low L: High] Motor Speed

MC7 MC9 MC3 MC9MC8 MC10

SOL2

M15 SOL1

SOL4

SOL3

CL CLM6M14 M12M13MC2MC4MC6

CN

20

7-A

1-A

2-A

3-A

4-A

5-A

6-A

7-A

8-A

9-A

10

-A1

1-A

12

-A1

3-A

14

-A1

5-A

16

-A1

7-A

18

-A1

9-A

20

-B1

-B2

-B3

-B4

-B5

-B6

-B7

-B8

-B9

-B1

0-B

11

-B1

2-B

13

-B1

4-B

15

-B1

6-B

17

-B1

8

-B1

9

-B2

0

12

11

1098765432165432132121219876543214321

CN826CN844CN868863848CN908CN934

CN826CN844CN868863848CN908CN934

CN931

CN931

CN927932

932

CN926CN894

CN945

321

CN

90

9-9-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

7654321

12345678910

11

12

1231234567891234

MC1

CN836CN843854CN849855862CN837

854CN849855862CN837

CN

20

8-A

1-A

2-A

3-A

4-A

5-A

6-A

7-A

8-A

9-A

10

-A1

1-A

12

-B1

-B2

-B3

-B4

-B5

-B6

-B7

-B8

-B9

-B1

0-B

11

-B1

2

6543216543212132121214321

1231234

CN925

321

922 CN807CN866841842847

922 CN807CN866841842847

CN

21

2-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-1

0-1

1-1

2-1

3-1

4

32121321212121

12312

947 CN938

32121

Tra

y 1 P

ap

er L

ift Se

nso

r

Re

lay S

en

sor

Tra

y 2 P

ap

er L

ift Se

nso

r

Tra

y 2 P

ap

er E

nd S

en

sor

Ve

rtical T

ran

spo

rt Se

nso

r

Tra

y 1 P

ap

er E

nd S

en

sor

Tray 1 P

aper Feed C

lutch

Tray 2 P

aper Feed C

lutch

CN821 CN819CN500CN819CN821

CN914 CN822 CN817CN913802825

CN914 CN822 CN817CN913802825

CN805

CN915CN916CN923

CN923

CN924

CN924

810811812813814CN818CN803CN23CN824815816

815816

Tra

y 1 P

ap

er H

eig

ht se

nso

r 1

Tra

y 1 P

ap

er H

eig

ht S

esn

or 2

Tra

y 2 P

ap

er H

eig

ht S

en

sor 2

Tra

y 2 P

ap

er H

eig

th S

en

sor 2

Air P

um

p M

oto

r

Tra

nsfe

r Be

lt Co

nta

ct Mo

tor

Op

tics Ho

usin

g C

oo

ling

Fa

n M

oto

r

Air F

low

Va

lve so

len

oid

-C

Air F

low

Va

lve S

ole

no

id-Y

Air F

low

Va

lve S

ole

no

id-M

CN

20

2-A

1-A

2-A

3-A

4-A

5-A

6-A

7-A

8-A

9-A

10

-A1

1-B

1-B

2-B

3-B

4-B

5-B

6-B

7-B

8-B

9-B

10

-B1

1

CN

20

3-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-1

0-1

1-1

2-1

3-1

4

6543213212121654321321876543217654321

123456123123456123

321321321321321321

CN

20

1-A

1-A

2-A

3-A

4-A

5-A

6-A

7-A

8-A

9-A

10

-A1

1-A

12

-B1

-B2

-B3

-B4

-B5

-B6

-B7

-B8

-B9

-B1

0-B

11

-B1

2

13

12

11

10987654321

12

11

10987654321

12345678910

11

12

12345678910

11

12

13

CN

97

0-1

3-1

2-1

1-1

0-9-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1C

N97

1-1

2-1

1-1

0-9-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN

20

5-A

1-A

2-A

3-A

4-A

5-A

6-A

7-A

8-A

9-A

10

-A1

1-A

12

-A1

3-B

1-B

2-B

3-B

4-B

5-B

6-B

7-B

8-B

9-B

10

-B1

1-B

12

-B1

3

21212121213213213213212121

CN

20

6-A

1-A

2-A

3-A

4-A

5-A

6-A

7-A

8-A

9-A

10

-A1

1-A

12

-A1

3-A

14

-B1

-B2

-B3

-B4

-B5

-B6

-B7

-B8

-B9

-B1

0-B

11

-B1

2-B

13

-B1

4

21214321214321432143212121321

910850CN864859CN858CN857CN856804828CN933

910850859828

Air F

low

Va

lve S

ole

no

id-K

Re

gistra

tion

Clu

tch

Hu

mid

ity Se

nso

r

Rig

ht D

oo

r Sw

itch

54321432121321

By-p

ass P

ick-up

So

len

oid

By-p

ass F

ee

d C

lutch

By-p

ass P

ap

er E

nd

Se

nso

r

Re

gistra

tion

Se

nso

r

To

ne

r Su

pply Clutch-M

Dvelopm

ent Clutch-M

TD

Se

nso

r-M

PC

U/D

eve

lop

me

nt

Un

it Se

t Sw

itch

Me

mo

ry Ch

ip-K

TD

Se

nso

r-K

TD

Se

nso

r-C

To

ne

r Su

pp

ly Clu

tch-KT

ran

sfer B

elt H

.P. S

en

sor

To

ne

r Su

pp

ly Clu

tch-YT

D S

enso

r-Y

Tra

nsfe

r Be

lt Co

nta

ct Se

nso

r

Wa

ste T

on

er B

ottle

Se

t Sw

itch

Wa

ste T

on

er S

en

sor

De

velo

pm

en

t Clu

tch-K

De

velo

pm

en

t Clu

tch-Y

De

velo

pm

en

t Clu

tch-C

GN

D [0

][$

5]

+5

V [5

]G

ND

[0]

[$5

]+

5V

[5]

GN

D [0

][$

5]

+5

V [5

] +

24

V [2

4]

[$2

4]

+2

4V

[24

][$

24

]G

ND

[0]

[$5

]+

5V

[5]

GN

D [0

][$

5]

+5

V [5

]G

ND

[0]

[$5

]+

5V

[5]

RxD

TxD

GN

D [0

]G

ND

[0]

+5

V [5

]+

5V

[5]

PG

ND

[0]

PG

ND

[0]

PG

ND

[0]

PG

ND

[0]

+2

4V

[24

]+

24

V [2

4]

+2

4V

[24

]+

24

V [2

4]

OP

SW

7O

PS

W6

OP

SW

5G

ND

[0]

+5

VE

[5]

OP

PR

SO

PP

RW

OP

PE

OP

PD

0O

PP

D1

OP

PD

2O

PP

D3

+5

VE

[5]

GN

D [0

]O

PS

W4

OP

PL

ED

0O

PP

LE

D1

OP

PL

ED

2O

PP

LE

D3

OP

SW

2G

ND

[0]

OP

SW

0O

PS

W3

OP

SW

1

GN

D [0

][$

5]

GN

D [0

][$

5]

GN

D [0

][$

5]

GN

D [0

][$

5]

GN

D [0

][$

5]

GN

D [0

][!

5]

+5

[5]

GN

D [0

][!

5]

+5

[5]

GN

D [0

][!

5]

+5

[5]

GN

D [0

][!

5]

+5

[5]

Lift [!

24

]D

ow

n [!

24

]L

Ift [!2

4]

Do

wn

[!2

4]

[!2

4]

GN

D [0

]C

W [!

24

]C

CW

[!2

4]

[$2

4]

N.C

.N

.C.

+2

4V

[24

]+

24

V [2

4]

[$2

4]

[$2

4]

N.C

.N

.C.

+2

4V

[24

][$

24

]N

.C.

+2

4V

[24

][$

24

]N

.C.

N.C

.+

24

V [2

4]

GN

D [0

]C

lose

[$5

]+

24

V [2

4]

[$2

4]

+5

V [5

]

GN

D [0

]

N.C

.N

.C.

N.C

.N

.C.

Size

4 [0

or 5

]S

ize 3

[0 o

r 5]

Size

2 [0

or 5

]S

ize 1

[0 o

r 5]

GN

D [0

][$

24

]

+2

4V

[24

]+

24

[24

][$

24

]G

ND

[0]

[!5

]+

5V

[5]

CO

NT

RO

L [0 ~

22

]+

12

V [1

2]

OU

TG

ND

[0]

GN

D [0

][$

5]

+5

V [5

]+

24

V [2

4]

[$2

4]

+2

4V

[24

][$

24

]D

eve

lop

me

nt U

nit-Y

[$5

]D

eve

lop

me

nt U

nit-C

[$5

]D

eve

lop

me

nt U

nit-M

[$5

]P

CU

-M [$

5]

PC

U-C

[$5

]P

CU

-Y [$

5]

PC

U-K

[$5

]D

eve

lop

me

nt U

nit-K

[$5

]G

ND

[0]

GN

D [0

]

+5

V [5

]

DA

TA

CL

OC

K

CO

NT

RO

L [0 ~

22

]+

12

V [1

2]

OU

TG

ND

[0]

N.C

.N

.C.

CO

NT

RO

L [0 ~

22

]+

12

V [1

2]

OU

TG

ND

[0]

+2

4V

[24

][$

24

]G

ND

[0]

[!5

]+

5V

[5]

+2

4V

[24

][$

24

]+

24

V [2

4]

[$2

4]

CO

NT

RO

L [0 ~

22

]+

12

V [1

2]

OU

TG

ND

[0]

N.C

.

GN

D [0

][!

5]

+5

V [5

]G

ND

[0]

[$5

]G

ND

[0]

[!5

]+

5V

[5]

+2

4V

[24

][$

24

]+

24

V [2

4]

[$2

4]

+2

4 [2

4]

[$2

4]

Paper Feed Unit/LCT(Option)

Operation Panel(PCB1)

999

999

Tray 1 T

ray Se

t Sw

itch

Tray 2 T

ray Paper S

ize S

witch

1

Tray 2 Lift M

oto

r

Tray 1 Lift M

oto

r

Tray 2 T

ray Paper S

ize S

witch

2

Tray 2 T

ray Paper S

ize S

witch

3

Tray 2 T

ray Paper S

ize S

witch

4

M9

M8

M10

M7

M11

CN216-1-2-3-4-5-6

+5VTxDGNDRxDN.C.

[0] GND[5] +5V[0/5] CLOCKN.C.[$5] LOCK[$5] ON[0] PGND[0] PGND[24] +24VS1[24] +24VS1

CN217-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8

CN218-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

CN215-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

-10-11

CN214-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

-10

[0] GND[5] +5V[0/5] CLOCKN.C.[$5] LOCK[$5] ON[0] PGND[0] PGND[24] +24VS2[24] +24VS2N.C.

[24 → 0/24] -B[24] +24VS2[24 → 0/24] B[24 → 0/24] A[24] +24VS2[24 → 0/24] -A

[24] +24VS3[24 → 0/24] A[24 → 0/24] -A[24] +24VS3[24 → 0/24] B[24 → 0/24] -BN.C.N.C.

[24] +24VS1[24 → 0/24] A[24 → 0/24] -A[24] +24VS1[24 → 0/24] B[24 → 0/24] -BN.C.

CN226-1-2-3-4-5

10987654321

10987654321

CN

88

4C

N88

5

Development DriveMotor-K

Development DriveMotor-CMY

Paper Feed Motor

Drum Drive Motor-K

Drum Drive Motor-CMY

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

!

"

[ ]

DC Line

Pulse Signal

Signal Direction

Active High

Active Low

Signal Level

Symbol Table

POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAM (G060)

ID Sensor

S1

TH

I2

TH

I1

1

501

50

S1

2

S1

0

S1

5

S1

3

S1

1

S1

6

SW

8

SW

7

SW

5

SW

6

SW

4

S2

0

S1

8

S2

1

S1

9

S2 SW

1

S2

3

CN836CN843

S4

S8

S5

S7SW

9

S2

2

To

ne

r Su

pp

ly Clu

tch-C

[!5]

Unit Set (230V) [$5]Unit Set (120V) [$5]

Oil S

up

ply U

nit S

ole

no

id

THI4

S23

THI3

L1

L2

Pressure Roller Thermofuse

Heating Roller Thermostat

N *

L *

Pa

pe

r Wid

th D

ete

ction

Bo

ard

SOL5

PC

B1

5

S1

7

S1

4

S3

SW

2

PC

B1

0S

24

S2

5

SW

10

PC

B1

1

PC

B1

2

PC

B1

3

SW

11

SW

3

H1

T3

0T

31

T3

2T

33

CN949

CN949

*: 120V machine: [!120]230V machine: [!230]

Two-tray Finisheror

Four-bin Mailbox

RY901

RY901

+24V

+5V

S2

S1

S5

S3

S4

SW

1

SW

2

Front Door and Left Door Switch(SW12)

RY901

➁➀

21

31

Unit Detection

120V machine 230V machine

(Duplex Unit: G571)

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (G060)

G060V104.WMFG060V106.WMF

G060V107.WMF G060V108.WMF G060V109.WMF

G060V105.WMF

Symbol Description Index No. P-to-PPrinted Circuit Boards

PCB1 Operation Panel 1-1 H7PCB2 LD Unit-Y 1-2 J5PCB3 LD Unit-K 1-3 J5PCB4 LD Unit-M 1-4 I5PCB5 LD Unit-C 1-5 I5PCB6 Laser Synchronizing Detector Board-MC – S 1-7 I4PCB7 Laser Synchronizing Detector Board-MC – E 1-12 I4PCB8 Laser Synchronizing Detector Board-YK – S 1-15 J4PCB9 Laser Synchronizing Detector Board-YK – E 1-17 J4PCB10 Memory Chip – K 2-1 D7PCB11 Memory Chip – Y 2-2 D5PCB12 Memory Chip – C 2-3 D5PCB13 Memory Chip – M 2-4 E5PCB14 High Voltage Supply Board - T, PA, CL 3-9 G4PCB15 Paper Width Detection Board 4-6 E7PCB16 PSU (Power Supply Unit) 6-10 D2PCB17 High Voltage Supply Board - C, B 6-12 E4PCB18 BCU 6-13 F6PCB19 Controller 6-14 B1

MotorsM1 LD Positioning Motor 1-6 G5M2 Polygon Motor 1-10 H5M3 3rd Mirror Positioning Motor-M 1-11 H5M4 3rd Mirror Positioning Motor-C 1-13 H5M5 3rd Mirror Positioning Motor-Y 1-14 H5M6 Air Pump 2-6 F7M7 Drum Drive Motor-K 5-1 B5

Symbol Description Index No. P-to-PM8 Development Drive Motor-K 5-2 A4M9 Development Drive Motor-CMY 5-6 A4M10 Drum Drive Motor-CMY 5-8 B5M11 Paper Feed Motor 5-15 B5

M12,13 Tray Lift Motor 5-18 G7M14 Transfer Belt Contact Motor 5-27 F7M15 Laser Optics Housing Cooling Fan Motor 6-1 F7M16 Fusing Fan Motor 6-2 C5M17 PSU Cooling Fan Motor 6-9 D5

SensorsS1 LD H.P. Sensor 1-8 G5S2 Humidity Sensor 2-11 F6S3 TD Sensor – M 2-13 E7S4 TD Sensor – C 2-13 C7S5 TD Sensor – Y 2-13 C7S6 TD Sensor – K 2-13 C7S7 Transfer Belt Contact Sensor 3-7 B7S8 Transfer Belt H.P. Sensor 3-8 C7S9 ID Sensor 3-10 F4

S10,11 Paper End Sensor 4-1 J7S12,13 Paper Lift Sensor 4-2 J7

S14 Registration Sensor 4-3 E7S15 Relay Sensor 4-7 J7S16 Vertical Transport Sensor 4-8 I7S17 By-pass Paper End Sensor 4-9 E7S18 Tray 1 Paper Height Sensor 2 5-17 G6S19 Tray 2 Paper Height Sensor 2 5-17 G6S20 Tray 1 Paper Height Sensor 1 5-19 G6

Symbol Description Index No. P-to-PS21 Tray 2 Paper Height Sensor 1 5-19 G6S22 Used Toner Sensor 5-25 B7S23 Paper Exit Sensor 6-3 C5S24 Paper Overflow Sensor 6-4 D5S25 Fusing Exit Sensor 6-6 D5

SwitchesSW1 Right Door Switch 2-5 F7SW2 PCU/Development Unit Set Switch 2-12 D7SW3 Vertical Transport Switch 4-10 D4SW4 Tray 2 Paper Size Switch – 4 5-20 G6SW5 Tray 2 Paper Size Switch – 2 5-21 G6SW6 Tray 2 Paper Size Switch – 3 5-22 G6SW7 Tray 2 Paper Size Switch – 1 5-23 G6SW8 Tray 1 Set Switch 5-24 H6SW9 Used Toner Bottle Set Switch 5-26 B7SW10 Left Door Switch 6-7 D5SW11 Main Switch 6-8 E4SW12 Front Door and Left Door Switch 6-11 D1

ClutchesMC1 By-pass Feed Clutch 4-4 E6MC2 Development Clutch-K 5-3 B7MC3 Toner Supply Clutch-K 5-4 C7MC4 Development Clutch-Y 5-5 B7MC5 Toner Supply Clutch-Y 5-7 C7MC6 Development Clutch-C 5-9 B7MC7 Toner Supply Clutch-C 5-10 C7MC8 Development Clutch-M 5-11 D7

Symbol Description Index No. P-to-PMC9 Toner Supply Clutch-M 5-12 D7MC10 Registration Clutch 5-13 F7MC11 Tray 1 Paper Feed Clutch 5-14 J7MC12 Tray 2 Paper Feed Clutch 5-16 J7

SolenoidsSOL1 Air Flow Valve Solenoid – M 2-7 F7SOL2 Air Flow Valve Solenoid – C 2-8 F7SOL3 Air Flow Valve Solenoid – Y 2-9 F7SOL4 Air Flow Valve Solenoid – K 2-10 F7SOL5 By-pass Pick-up Solenoid 4-5 E7SOL6 Exit Junction Gate Solenoid 5-28 C5SOL7 Oil Supply Unit Solenoid 6-5 C5

LampsL1 Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp 3-5 C4L2 Heating Roller Fusing Lamp 3-6 C4

ThermistorsTH1 Thermistor 1 1-16 G5TH2 Thermistor 2 1-9 G5TH3 Heating Roller Thermistor 3-3 D4TH4 Pressure Roller Thermistor 3-2 D4

Thermofuse/StatTHO1 Pressure Roller Thermofuse 3-1 C4THO2 Heating Roller Thermostat 3-4 C4

H1 Anti-condensation Heater - E4

10

15

76

54

32

811121314

17

1

1113

1

6

12

364

7

8

9

10

3

4

5

6

7

89

212

34

56

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1

23

24

25

5

12

6

8

7

13

14

12

34

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3

Fig. 6Fig. 5Fig. 4

9

16

7

12

9

1011

19

18

17

26

27

28

5

10

23

4

5

8

9

10

22

21

20


G571D102.WMF

G571D103.WMF

1 2 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTION (G571)

Symbol Description Index No. P-to-PMotors

M1 Duplex inverter 1 4 F3M2 Duplex inverter 2 8 F3M3 Duplex feed 12 G1

SensorsS1 Exit 1 1 G3S2 Duplex feed 13 G1S3 Duplex inverter 10 G3S4 Exit 2 2 G3S5 Exit 3 9 G3

SolenoidsSOL1 Junction gate 3 G3

SwitchesSW1 Duplex door 6 F3SW2 Duplex inverter unit 7 G3

PCBsPCB1 Duplex control 5 F2

PCB2 Duplex drive 11 F1

S1

S2

S3

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

S4

S5

819

820

821

CN

129

CN

235

13

11

32

13

31

34

135

136

CN104- 1- 2- 3

- 4- 5- 6

- 7- 8- 9

- 1- 2- 3

- 4- 5- 6

- 7- 8- 9

- 9- 8- 7

- 6- 5- 4

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

CN105- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 5

- 6

- 7

- 8

- 9

- 10

- 11

- 12

- 13

- 14

CN120

CN121

CN100- 1- 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 7

- 8

- 10- 11- 12- 13- 14

- 9

- 8- 7- 6- 5- 4- 3- 2- 1

- 7- 6- 5- 4- 3- 2- 1

PSUCN1

CN2

H1

124

MC1

CN128

CN101- 1- 2- 4- 5- 6- 7

CN102- 1

- 2- 1

- 2

CN103- 1

- 2

- 4

- 1

- 2

- 3

[ 24]!

[24] Vaa

Open

Vaa.SW

[ 24]!

[24] Vaa

[ 24]"

Vaa.SW [24]

AAB

BBB

[24] Vaa[24] Vaa[24] Vaa[24] Vaa

[0] AGND[0] AGND

[0] AGND

[24 0/24]

[0] AGND[5] Vcc[5] Vcc[0] CGND[0] CGNDRXDTXD

"[ 5]

[0 or 5]

[0 or 5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

"[ 5]

"[ 5]

"[ 5]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

[ 5]! CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0][ 5]!

"[ 5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

Lift Sensor

Relay Sensor

Paper End Sensor

Paper Size Sensor - 1




Paper Height Sensor - 1


Main Frame

Paper Feed Motor

Paper Feed Clutch

Vertical Guide Switch

SW5

POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAM (One-tray Paper Feed Unit: G567)

A B C D E F G H

A B C D E F G H

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

TrayHeater

(Option)

M1

Vaa.SW [24]

[24 0/24][24 0/24][24 0/24]

126M2

- 5

- 6

CN102

- 1

- 2

[ 24]!

[ 24]! (+)

(-)Tray Lift Motor

Main Board(PCB1)

"

!

[ ]

DC Line

Pulse Signal

Signal Direction

Active High

Active Low

Signal Level

Symbol Table


G567D101.WMF

1

56

7

8

9

10

11

12

14

13

23

4



M1 Paper Feed 6 G2M2 Tray Lift 11 B4

SensorsS1 Lift 8 G3S2 Relay 12 G3S3 Paper End 7 G4S4 Paper Height 1 14 G5S5 Paper Height 2 13 G5

SwitchesSW1 Paper Size 1 1 G4SW2 Paper Size 2 2 G4SW3 Paper Size 3 3 G5SW4 Paper Size 4 4 G5SW5 Vertical Guide 10 B5

Magnetic ClutchesMC1 Paper Feed 9 B4

PCBsPCB1 Main 5 D6

HeatersH1 Tray Heater (Option) - C2

S1

S3

S5

S2

S4

S6

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

S7

S8

SW5

SW6

SW7

SW8

S9

S10

819

820

821

CN

129

CN

235

822

823

824

CN

130

CN

236

13

11

32

13

31

34

135

136

13

71

38

13

91

40

141

142

CN104- 1- 2- 3

- 4- 5- 6

- 7- 8- 9

- 1- 2- 3

- 4- 5- 6

- 7- 8- 9

- 9- 8- 7

- 6- 5- 4

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

CN105- 1- 2- 3

- 4- 5- 6

- 7- 8- 9

- 9- 8- 7

- 6- 5- 4

- 3- 2- 1

- 1- 2- 3

- 4- 5- 6

- 7- 8- 9

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

CN106- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 5

- 6

- 7

- 8

- 10

- 11

- 12

- 13

- 14

- 15

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

CN107- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 5

- 6

- 7

- 8

- 9

- 10

- 11

- 12

- 13

- 14

CN120

CN121

CN100- 1- 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 7

- 8

- 10- 11- 12- 13- 14

- 9

- 8- 7- 6- 5- 4- 3- 2- 1

- 7- 6- 5- 4- 3- 2- 1

PSUCN1

CN2

H1

M1

124

MC1

125

MC2

126

126

M2

M3

CN128

CN101- 1- 2- 4- 5- 6- 7

CN102- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 9

- 10

- 11

- 12

CN102

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

CN103- 1

- 2

- 4

- 1

- 2

- 3

[ 5]!

[ 24]!

[24] Vaa

Open

Vaa.SW

[ 24]!

[ 24]!

[ 24]!

[ 24]!

[ 24]! (+)

(-)

(+)

(-)

[24] Vaa

[24] Vaa

[ 24]"

[ 24]"

[24] Vaa.SW[24] Vaa.SW

AABBBB

[24] Vaa[24] Vaa[24] Vaa[24] Vaa

[0] AGND[0] AGND

[0] AGND

[24 0/24][24 0/24][24 0/24][24 0/24]


"[ 5]

[0 or 5]

[0 or 5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

"[ 5]

"[ 5]

"[ 5]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

"[ 5]

[0 or 5]

[0 or 5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

"[ 5]

"[ 5]

"[ 5]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0][ 5]!

"[ 5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

[ 5]!

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0][ 5]!

"[ 5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

Upper Lift Sensor

Upper Relay Sensor

Upper Paper EndSensor

Lower Lift Sensor

Lower Relay Sensor

Lower Paper EndSensor

Upper Paper SizeSensor - 1

Upper Paper Size Sensor - 2



Lower Paper SizeSensor - 1




Upper Paper HeightSensor - 1

Upper Paper HeightSensor - 2

Lower Paper HeightSensor - 1

Lower Paper HeightSensor - 2

Main Frame

Paper Feed Motor

Upper Paper FeedClutch

Lower Paper FeedClutch

Upper Tray Lift Motor

Lower Tray Lift Motor

Right Door SafetySwitch

SW9

POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAM (Two-tray Paper Feed Unit: G568)A B C D E F G H

A B C D E F G H

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

TrayHeater

(Option)

Main Board(PCB1)

"

!

[ ]

DC Line

Pulse Signal

Signal Direction

Active High

Active Low

Signal Level

Symbol Table


G568D101.WMF

12

34

56

78

9

10

11

12

13

14

1516

17

1819

2021

22

24

23

25



M1 Paper Feed 7 B3M2 Upper Tray Lift 12 B4M3 Lower Tray Lift 16 B5

SensorsS1 Upper Lift 9 G1S2 Lower Lift 15 G2S3 Upper Relay 21 G1S4 Lower Relay 18 G2S5 Upper Paper End 11 G1S6 Lower Paper End 17 G2S7 Upper Paper Height 1 6 G4S8 Upper Paper Height 2 8 G4S9 Lower Paper Height 1 20 G5

S10 Lower Paper Height 2 19 G6

SwitchesSW1 Upper Paper Size 1 1 G3SW2 Upper Paper Size 2 2 G3SW3 Upper Paper Size 3 3 G3SW4 Upper Paper Size 4 4 G4SW5 Lower Paper Size 1 25 G4SW6 Lower Paper Size 2 23 G5SW7 Lower Paper Size 3 24 G5SW8 Lower Paper Size 4 22 G5SW9 Vertical Guide 14 B5

MotorsMC1 Upper Paper Feed 10 B3MC2 Lower Paper Feed 13 B4

PCBsPCB1 Main 5 D6

HeatersH1 Tray Heater (Option) - C2

S3

S2

S1

S12

S5

S6

S8

S9

819

820

821

CN

129

CN

235

13

1134

135

176

177

CN104- 1- 2- 3

- 4- 5- 6

- 7- 8- 9

- 1- 2- 3

- 4- 5- 6

- 7- 8- 9

- 9- 8- 7

- 6- 5- 4

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

- 3- 2- 1

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

CN106- 1

- 2

- 7

- 8

- 9

- 10

- 11

- 12

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 7

- 8

- 9

- 10

- 11

- 12

CN120

CN121

CN100- 1- 2- 3- 4- 5- 6- 7

- 8

- 10- 11- 12- 13- 14

- 9

- 8- 7- 6- 5- 4- 3- 2- 1

- 7- 6- 5- 4- 3- 2- 1

PSUCN1

CN2

H1

M1

124

MC1

165

MC2

126M2

CN128

CN101- 1- 2- 4- 5- 6- 7

CN102- 1

- 2

- 7

- 8

- 9

- 10

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

- 1

- 2

CN103- 1

- 2

- 4

- 1

- 2

- 3

[ 24]!

[24] Vaa

Open

Vaa.SW

[ 24]!

[ 24]!

[ 24]!

(+)

(-)

[24] Vaa

[24] Vaa

[ 24]"

[ 24]"

[2 4] Vaa.SW[2 4] Vaa.SW

AABBBB

[24] Vaa[24] Vaa[24] Vaa[24] Vaa

[0] AGND[0] AGND

[0] AGND

[24 0/24][24 0/24][24 0/24][24 0/24]


Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

"[ 5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

CGND [0][ 5]!

"[ 5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

Upper Limit Sensor

Relay Sensor

Right TrayPaper End Sensor

Tray Sensor



Paper Height Sensor 4

Paper Height Sensor 5

Main Frame

Tray Motor

Paper Feed Clutch

Transport Clutch

Tray Lift Motor

Vertical Guide Switch

SW1

POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAM (Large Capacity Tray: G569)

A B C D E F G H

A B C D E F G H

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

TrayHeater

(Option)

"[ 5]

S7

136

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 13

- 14

- 15 Vcc [5]

CGND [0]


S4

S10

160

161

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 5

- 6 Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

Lower Limit Sensor

Paper Size Sensor

S13

162

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 7

- 8

- 9 Vcc [5]

CGND [0]Side Fence Open/Close

Sensor

S14

S11

174

175

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 5

- 6 Vcc [5]

Vcc [5]

CGND [0]

CGND [0]

Left Tray Paper End Sensor

End Fence HP Sensor

[ 5]!

[ 5]!

[ 5]!

[ 5]!

[ 5]!

[ 5]!

[ 5]!

CN109

CN108

[ 5]!A4

CN

170

CN

172

- 6

- 5

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 6

- 5

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 7

- 6

- 5

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 7

- 6

- 5

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 1

"[ 5]

"[ 5]

Main Board(PCB1)

Close

"

!

[ ]

DC Line

Pulse Signal

Signal Direction

Active High

Active Low

Signal Level

Symbol Table


G569D101.WMF

1

23

56

78

9

1011

12

13

17

181920

15

16

14


Symbol Description Index No. P-to-PM1 Tray Motor 9 B3M2 Tray Lift Motor 18 B4

S1 Right Tray Paper End 14 G2S2 Relay 19 G1S3 Upper Limit 11 G1S4 Lower Limit 17 G3S5 Paper Height 1 10 G2S6 Paper Height 2 13 G3S7 Paper Height 3 15 G3S8 Paper Height 4 3 G5S9 Paper Height 5 4 G6

S10 Paper Size 5 G4S11 End Fence Home Position 1 G5S12 Tray 8 G2S13 Side Fence Open/Closed 7 G4S14 Left Tray Paper End 2 G5

SW1 Vertical Guide 16 B5

MC1 Paper Feed 12 B3MC2 Stack Transport 20 B4

PCB1 Main 6 D6

H1 Tray Heater (Option) - C2

Main (PCB 1)

S9

S27

S30

S26

S16

Main Unit

S1

S24

S23

S13

S18

S17

S6

S28

S29

S31

S25

S7

S10

S8

S22

S5

S20

S35

S21

S12

S11

SW5

S3

M1

M13

M5

M2

M6

M12

M4

M10

M11

M8

M3

M15

M7

SOL1

CL1

M14

SOL5

SOL3

SOL2

SOL4

M16

M9

CL2

M17

CN101-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8

CN102-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

CN103-1-2

CN104-10-9-8-7-6-5-4

CN104-3-2-1

S2

S19

S14

S15

CN132-10-9-8

CN132-7-6-5-4-3

CN132-2-1

CN105-6-5-4

CN105-3-2-1

CN106-9-8-7

CN106-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN129-15-14-13-12

CN129-11-10-9-8

CN129-7-6-5-4

CN129-3-2-1

CN117-10-9-8-7-6-5-4

CN117-3-2-1

CN108-9-8-7

CN108-6-5-4

CN108-3-2-1

CN109-6-5-4

CN109-3-2-1

CN134-4-3-2-1

CN130-8-7-5-4-3

CN130-2-1

CN131-15-14-13-12-11-10

-9-8-7-6-5-4

CN131-3-2-1

CN107-4-3-2-1

CN121-1-2-3-4-5-6

CN110-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

CN111-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

CN113-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

CN112-1-2-3

-4-5-6

-7-8

CN114-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

-10-11-12-13-14-15

CN115-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

CN116-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

CN109-8-9

-10-11-12-13-14

CN118-1-2-3-4-5-6

CN128-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

-10-11-12-13

CN119-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8

CN133-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9

-10-11

CN127-1-2

CN120-1-2

CN124-1-2

CN125-1-2

CN126-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8

CN123-4-3-2-1

CN122-5-4-3-2-1

Front Door Safety Sw

Entrance Cover Sn.

Entrance Sensor

Staple Tray Entrance Sn.

Upper Stack Height 2 Sn.

Upper Stack Height 1 Sn.

Tray 1 Upper Limit Sw

Upper Exit Sn.

Upper Cover Sn.

Lower Exit Sn.

Lower Stack Height 2 Sn.

Lower Stack Height 1 Sn.

Tray 1 Overflow 2 Sn.


Shift Mode Sn.


Tray 1 Lower Limt Sn.


Tray 2 Shunt Position Sn.

Tray 2 Lower Limit Sn.

Stack Feed-out H.P Sn.

Jogger H.P Sn.

Staple Tray Paper Sn.

Stapler H.P Sn.

Stapler Rotation H.P Sn.

Punch Motor

Punch CL

Punch H.P Sn.

Punch Hopper Sn.

Punch Hole Sw

Punch Hole Motor

Staple Hammer Motor

(SW1)Exit Guide Safety Sw

Exit Gide Plate Open Sn.

Stapler Junction Gate Sol.

Pre-stack Junction Gate Sol.

Positioning Roller Sol.

Tray Junction Gate Sol.

(SW2)

(SW2)Tray 1 Safety Sw

Tray Release Sn.

Tray Shift 1 Sn.

Staple Mode Sn.

Tray Shift 2 Sn.

Pre-Stack Motor

Stapler Motor

Stapler Rotation Motor

Tray 2 Half-turn Sn.

Tray 2 Uppre Limit SW(SW4)

(SW4)

Jogger Motor

Stack Feed-out Motor

Exit Guid Plate Motor

Tray 1 Lift Motor

Tray 2 Lift Motor

Exit Motor

Lower Transport Motor

Upper Transport Motor

Entrance Motor

Tray Lock Sol.

Back Fence Lock CL

Tray 1 Shift Motor

(SW6)

(SW3)

CN501-1-2

CN501-2-1

CN401-2-1

CN401-1-2

CN510-2-1

CN510-1-2

CN301-8-9

CN301-1-5-7

-11

CN217-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN217-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

CN504-5-4

CN504-1-2

CN606-2-1

CN606-1-2

CN504-3-2-1

CN504-3-4-5

CN216-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN216-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

CN227-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN227-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

CN207-13-12-11-10-9-8

-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN208-8-7

-5-4

-2-1

CN206-11

-9

-7

-5

CN206-3-2-1

CN310-4-3-2-1

CN311-5-4-3-2-1

CN1-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN2-9-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN203-1-2-3

CN203-1-2-3

CN200-1-2-3

CN202-1-2-3

CN706-1-2-3

CN705-1-2-3

CN205-1-2-3

CN204-1-2-3

CN100-1-2-3

CN512-1-2-3

CN510-1-2-3-4-5-6

CN702-1-2-3

CN701-1-2-3

CN404-1-2-3

CN402-1-2-3

CN508-1-2-3

CN403-1-2-3

CN405-1-2-3

CN507-1-2-3

CN506-1-2-3

CN608-3-2-1

CN509-1-2-3

CN305-1-2-3

CN304-1-2-3

CN303-1-2-3

CN100-1-2-3

CN308-1-2-3

CN309-1-2-3

CN704-1CN704-2CN703-1CN703-2

CN603-2-3-4-5

CN602-1-2

CN605-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8

CN605-1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8

CN604-1-2-3

CN601-1-2-3

CN606-1-2-3-4

CN412-3-2-1

CN413-3-2-1

CN414-3-2-1

CN414-3-2-1

CN503-3-2-1

+24V+24V+24VGNDGNDGNDN.CN.C

N.CGNDTXDGNDRXDN.CN.CN.CN.C

24V[!24] Front Door Safety Sw

+5V["5] Entrance Cover Sn.GNDN.C+5V["5] Entrance SensorGND

+5VGND[!5] Staple Tray Entrance Sn.

+5V[!5] Upper Stack Height 1 Sn.GND

+5V[!5] Upper Stack Height 2 Sn.GNDN.CN.C

[!5] Tray 1 Upper Limit Sw

+5V["5] Upper Exit Sn.GND

+5V["5] Upper Cover Sn.GND

GND[!5] Lower Exit Sn.+5V

+5V[!5] Lower Stack Height 2 Sn.GND+5V[!5] Lower Stack Height 1 Sn.GND+5V[!5] Tray 1 Overflow 2 Sn.GNDN.C+5V[!5] Tray 1 Overflow 2 Sn.GNDN.C+5V[!5] Shift Mode Sn.GNDN.C+5V[!5] Tray 1 Overflow 1 Sn.GND

+5V[!5] Tray 1 Lower Limt sn.GND

+5V[!5] Tray 2 Overflow 1 Sn.GNDN.C+5V[!5] Tray 2 Shunt Position Sn.GND

+5V[!5] Tray 2 Lower Limit Sn.GND

+5V["5] Stack Feed-out H.P Sn.GND

+5V[!5] Jogger H.P Sn.GND

+5V["5] Staple Tray Paper Sn.GND

+5V[!5] Stapler H.P Sn.GND

+5V[!5] Stapler Rotation H.P Sn.GND

Set DetecitonSet DetecitonSet DetecitonGND

N.CGND+24V["5] Punch Motor ON/OFF["5] Punch LD

["24] Punch CL+24V

GNDGNDPunch Unit DetectionPunch Unit DetectionPunch Unit DetectionPunch Unit DetectionGNDGNDN.C+5V["5] Punch H.P Sn.GND

GND["5] Punch Hopper Sn.+5V

GND["5] Punch Hole SW+24V["24] Punch Hole Motor ON/OFF

Exit Guide Plate Motor: + ["24V]Exit Guide Plate Motor: - ["24V]

Tray2 Shift Motor: - ["24V]Tray2 Shift Motor: + ["24V]

+24VTray2 Upper Limit SW [!24V]

+24VTray2 Upper Limit SW [!24V]

GNDTray2 Half-turn Sn. ["5]

5V

GNDTray Shift 2 Sn. ["5]

+5VGND

Staple Mode Sn. [!5]+5VN.C

GNDTray Shift 1 Sn. [!5]

+5VGND

Tray Release Sn. [!5]+5V

24VTray Lock Sol. ["24]

N.C24V

Back Fence Lock CL ["24]N.C

Tray 1 Shift Motor- ["24]Tray 1 Shift Motor+ ["24]

+24VN.C

Tray 1 Safety SW [!24]N.C

+24VN.C

Tray 1 Safety SW [!24]N.CN.CN.CN.C

+24VTray Junction Gate Sol. ["24]

+24VPositioning Roller Sol. ["24]

+24VPre-stack Juction Gate Sol. ["24]

24VStapler Junction Gate Sol. ["24]

GNDExit Guide Plate Open Sn. [!5]

5VN.C

+24VN.C

Exit Guide Safety SW [!24]N.C

Staple Hammer Motor-B [0-24]Staple Hammer Motor-B [0-24]Staple Hammer Motor+B [0-24]Staple Hammer Motor+B [0-24]

+5VStaple Hummer H.P Sn. [!5]

Staple Position Sn. [!5]Staple End Sn. [!5]

GND

A B C D E F G H

A B C D E F G H

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAM (Two-tray Finisher: G565)24V24V24V

GNDGNDGNDN.CN.C

N.CGNDTXDGNDRXDN.CN.CN.CN.C

CN117-13-12-11

Punch Unit

Tray 2 Shift Motor

CN607-3-2-1

Staple Unit

+24VEntrance Motor: A [0-24]Entrance Motor: A [0-24]Entrance Motor: B [0-24]Entrance Motor: B [0-24]

+24V

+24V+24V

N.CUpper Transport Motor: A [0-24]Upper Transport Motor: A [0-24]Upper Transport Motor: B [0-24]Upper Transport Motor: B [0-24]

+24V+24V

N.CLower Transport Motor: A [0-24]Lower Transport Motor: A [0-24]Lower Transport Motor: B [0-24]Lower Transport Motor: B [0-24]

+24V+24V

N.CExit Motor: A [0-24]Exit Motor: A [0-24]Exit Motor: B [0-24]Exit Motor: B [0-24]

+24V+24V

N.CStack Feed-out Motor: A [0-24]Stack Feed-out Motor: A [0-24]Stack Feed-out Motor: B [0-24]Stack Feed-out Motor: B [0-24]

N.C+24V+24V

N.CJogger Motor: A [0-24]Jogger Motor: A [0-24]Jogger Motor: B [0-24]Jogger Motor: B [0-24]

+24VPre-stack Motor: A [0-24]Pre-stack Motor: A [0-24]Pre-stack Motor: B [0-24]Pre-stack Motor: B [0-24]

+24V

+24V+24V

N.CStapler Motor: A [0-24]Stapler Motor: A [0-24]Stapler Motor: B [0-24]Stapler Motor: B [0-24]

+24V+24V

N.CStaple Rotation Motor: A [0-24]Staple Rotation Motor: A [0-24]Staple Rotation Motor: B [0-24]Staple Rotation Motor: B [0-24]

CN203-3-2-1

CN512-3-2-1

CN510-6-5-4-3-2-1

CN506-3-2-1

CN308-3-2-1

CN704-2CN704-1CN703-2CN703-1

CN207-1-2-3-4-5-6

-8-9

-10-11-12-13

CN208-1-2

-4-5

-7-8

CN206-1

-3

-5

-7

CN301-11-7-5-1

CN301-4-3

Tray2 Lift Motor: + ["24V]Tray2 Lift Motor: - ["24V]

N.CTray1 Lift Motor: + ["24V]Tray1 Lift Motor: - ["24V]

N.C

Symbol Table

!

"

[ ]

DC Line

Pulse Signal

Signal Direction

Active High

Active Low

Signal Level

Front Set Sw (SW7)Rear Set Sw (SW8)


G565D902.WMF

G565D901.WMF

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

3018

19

20

1 23

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

G565D903.WMF

G565D251.WMF

31

32

33

3435

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

51

52

53

545556

57

58

59

60

61

62

49

50

G565D904.WMF

63

64

65

66

6768



M1 Entrance 40 F1M2 Exit 31 F2M3 Exit guide plate 30 G2M4 Jogger 33 F3M5 Lower transport 37 F1M6 Tray 2 lift 44 G2M7 Tray 2 shift 24 G3M8 Pre-stack 38 G4M9 Punch 64 B5

M10 Stapler rotation 54 F3M11 Stapler 34 F3M12 Stack feed-out 32 F2M13 Upper transport 39 F1M14 Tray 1 shift 8 F5M15 Tray 1 lift 43 F2M16 Staple hammer 57 G6M17 Punch hole 68 B6

SensorsS1 Entrance cover 46 B2S2 Entrance 47 B2S3 Exit guide plate open 18 G6S4 Staple position 61 E6S5 Jogger HP 48 B4S6 Tray 2 overflow-2 26 B3S7 Tray 2 overflow-1 27 B4S8 Tray 2 lower limit 25 B4S9 Tray 2 half-turn 22 G3

S10 Tray 2 shunt position 23 B4S11 Punch hopper 63 B6S12 Punch HP 65 B6S13 Lower exit 19 B3S14 Upper stack height 1 2 B2S15 Upper stack height 2 3 B2S16 Tray release 16 G4S17 Lower stack height 1 20 B3S18 Lower stack height 2 21 B3S19 Staple tray entrance 52 B2S20 Staple tray paper 51 B5S21 Stapler rotation HP 55 B5S22 Stack feed-out HP 62 B4S23 Upper cover 45 B3S24 Upper exit 1 B3S25 Tray 1 lower limit 11 B4S26 Tray shift 1 4 G4

Symbol Description Index No. P-to-PS27 Tray shift 2 5 G4S28 Shift mode 14 B3S29 Tray 1 overflow-2 12 B3S30 Staple mode 6 G4S31 Tray 1 overflow-1 15 B4S32 Staple hammer HP 60 E6S34 Staple end 58 E6S35 Stapler HP 56 B5

SelenoidsSOL1 Tray lock 7 F4SOL2 Pre-stack junction gate 35 F5SOL3 Positioning roller 36 G5SOL4 Stapler junction gate 41 G5SOL5 Tray junction gate 42 F5

SwitchesSW1 Exit guide safety 29 G6SW2 Tray 1 safety 9 G5SW3 Tray 1 upper limit 17 B2SW4 Tray 2 upper limit 28 G3SW5 Punch hole 67 C6SW6 Front door safety 53 B2SW7 Front set 50 B5SW8 Rear set 49 B5

Electrical ClutchesCL1 Back fence lock 10 G4CL2 Punch 66 B5

PCBsPCB1 Main 13 D4

PCB2 Stapler Sensor 59 NA

CN104- 1

- 2

- 8

- 7

- 5

- 6

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 1

CN108- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 5

- 6

- 7

- 8

- 9

CN100- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 5

- 6

- 7

- 8

- 10

- 11

- 12

- 9

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

SOL3

CN103- 1

- 2

- 4

- 5

- 6

- 7

CN102

- 2

24V [24]

[ 24]!

24V [24]

A

B

[24 0/24]

[0] GND2

Open

TXD

RXD

5V [5]

5V [5]

GND2 [0]

GND1 [0]

GND1 [0]

GND2 [0]

[ 5]"

![ 5]

Junction GateSolenoid 3

Tray 4 PaperOverflow Sensor

Main Motor

POINT TO POINT WIRING DIAGRAM (Four-bin Mailbox: G566)

A B C D E F G H

A B C D E F G H

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5

6

M1

24V [24]

[24 0/24]

[24 0/24]

[24 0/24]

SOL2

S2

S11

S10

S1

S9

S8

S3

S5

S7

S4

S6

CN

200

CN

201

[0] GND2

CN

202

[0] GND2

CN

203

- 3

- 2

- 1

CN211

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 6

- 5

- 4

[0] GND2

[5] 5V

[5] 5V

[5] 5V

[5] 5V

- 1

- 2

- 3

CN

204

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 9

- 8

- 7

[0] GND2

[5] 5V

- 4

- 5

- 6

CN

205

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 6

- 5

- 4

[0] GND2

[5] 5V

- 7

- 8

- 9

CN

206

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

[0] GND2

[5] 5V

CN101

CN212

- 1

- 2

- 3

CN

207

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 6

- 5

- 4

[0] GND2

[5] 5V

- 4

- 5

- 6

CN

208

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

[0] GND2

[5] 5V

- 7

- 8

- 9

CN

209

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 6

- 5

- 4

[0] GND2

[5] 5V

- 10

- 11

- 12

CN

210

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 3

- 2

- 1

[0] GND2

[5] 5V

CN213

CN214

A

B

SOL1

SOL4

24V [24]

[ 24]!

CN106- 1

- 224V [24]

[ 24]!

CN107- 1

- 224V [24]

[ 24]!

CN105- 1

- 2

CN215

CN216GND1 [0]

GND1 [0]

24V [24]

24V [24]

24V [24]

24V [24]

N.C.

N.C.

N.C.

CN109- 1

- 2

- 3

- 4

- 5

- 6

- 7

- 8

- 8

- 7

- 5

- 6

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 1

- 9

- 8

- 7

- 5

- 6

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 1

CN310- 9

CN300- 8

- 7

- 5

- 6

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 1

Door Sensor

![ 5]Tray 4 Paper Sensor

Tray 3 Paper Sensor


[ 5]"

![ 5]


Upper VerticalTransport Sensor

[ 5]"

[ 5]"

Tray 2 Paper Sensor

Tray 1 Paper Sensor


Lowe VerticalTransport Sensor

Main Control Board(PCB1)




Main Frame

[ 5]"

[ 5]"

![ 5]

![ 5] Symbol Table

!

"

[ ]

DC Line

Pulse Signal

Signal Direction

Active High

Active Low

Signal Level


G566D103.WMF

1

2

3

45

6

7

9

10

1112

1314

16

17

8

15


Symbols Description Index No. P-to-PMotors

M1 Main 2 G1

SensorsS1 Tray 4 Paper 6 B2S2 Tray 3 Paper 14 B3S3 Upper Vertical Transport 8 B4S4 Lower Vertical Transport 10 B5S5 Tray 2 Paper 13 B4S6 Tray 1 Paper 12 B5S7 Tray 1 Paper Overflow 11 B4S8 Tray 2 Paper Overflow 9 B3S9 Tray 3 Paper Overflow 7 B2

S10 Tray 4 Paper Overflow 5 B2S11 Door 4 B1

SolenoidsSOL1 Junction Gate Solenoid 1 16 G3SOL2 Junction Gate Solenoid 2 17 G2SOL3 Junction Gate Solenoid 3 3 G2SOL4 Junction Gate Solenoid 4 15 G3

PCBsPCB1 Main Control 1 E5

Documents

Ricoh 3800c (Model j Machine Code 060) Service Manual